Home

Downloading - AD INSTRUMENTS

1. fa ATLA 39 5 JHEP RPE HE China ROHS HSR yr mA EE RAG BE EP ee HEA EAE HHE Tm XXXXXX HEH HR HERRERNE EEA m ERRE mE IE RAA SA TAE CEMEL F ON 25 PR PTB AACR AE A OO EB IE ET F AAE WDA BERAAI Pl AARNE Em i Ht IER ERE OLE 3 in EHF E ABS rh REE A IE AS AA EWA MRE ERRI ABA ED RRICR BEER Hi Pb K Hg WC AMRCR ZIROR PBB ZW ANE PBDE TH o o o Q 2 2 EDD An EE A X O O O Oo O LEKE 0 0 0 0 O oO fan BE O O oO oO O O GERA oO O O Q O O Eji O O fe O ERJ O oO O O O O HERBE oO O O oO oO O TER O oO O O O oO JARI O 0 0 0 le 0 deere eae O O O O Oo O pe Sera ae Oo ie Oo ie Oo Oo PRZ O 5 O O O O BHE O Shi FLAS AEC Bt oO O 0 2 Oo Oo HK 0 oO O O O O PRA EF DEMIE O O O O O O ARAN O O oO O O O HAERE O O O O Oo lo O RAHA TALE A EI IE SUIT 11363 2006 X KRZA FA AD AEE OE Pe BH SJ T 11363 2006 User Manual 780000102 16 313 Appendix A RoHS Information Concerned products All OTDR VLR 8100 Modules Series Concerned products All OTDR VLR 8100 Modules Series 8118 VLR 24 38 45 48 49 65 8118R VLR65 8128 VLR65 8138 VLR 24 38 49 8148 VLR 24 38 49 China RoHS E TIA AP m Y Re hl E I AARE 39 5 DEBS ade ht China ROHS 22 SR HIP m I ERMA EI A BS oa di FFE BLANC AY I FE o T mR XXXXXX H Aa
2. 20 0055 225 Display of results for an ORL manual measurement 225 File Management 22 e cece eee eee ences 226 Storing results i sereset n a E a E a e 226 Recalling files irera acc ace n hue are aoe ae E ed 227 Chapter 13 Multi Test Access Unit 229 Function of the MTAU module 2005 230 Connection miaa e a s ee eee ene ere eine eee 230 Configuration aaa aa e a eatin Mei nda 231 Manualimode icc nae aa a a eee oe 231 Auto mode aeiiaaie Lea eed eer baie ee 232 Configuration of the sequence of tests 233 Performing the sequence of tests 234 Use of the script specific client option 235 Connect the modules to the MTAU 235 Launching the Script 0 0 eee eee 236 Chapter 14 Broadband source BBS 241 Function of the BBS module 0005 242 Activation process 000 e eee eee eee eee 242 Remote interlock connector 2200eee0e 244 Chapter 15 File management 245 File configuration menu 00 eee ee eee eee 246 Managing tabs 0 2 0 cece eee eee 246 File signature 000 00 c eee eee 247 File infornmation s r ee ete ta ie he eee 247 Current directory 20 0 0 cc cece eee 247 Rules for naming files 0 000000 cece eee ee 247 Name of a file sanie ii sadari mene ed id ae epee ty 249 AUOST pti eee od eee aoe nial ene S 249 Bile Type sieran ane
3. Principle of reflectometry measurements on page 2 Principle of bi directional measurement on page 4 Principle of WDM OSA analysis on page 5 PMD principle on page 7 Principle of measurement of Chromatic Dispersion CD OTDR using pulse delay method on page 9 Principle of measurement of Chromatic Dispersion CD ODM using phase shift method on page 13 Principle of optical power and attenuation measurements OFI on page 13 Standards and l0 for different types of fiber on page 15 User Manual 780000102 16 1 Chapter 1 Principles of measurement Principle of reflectometry measurements Principle of reflectometry measurements Information yielded by the measurement Optical time domain reflectometry consists in injecting a light pulse into one end of the optical fiber to be analyzed and observing at the same end the optical intensity passing through the fiber in the opposite direc tion to the propagation of the pulse The signal detected is exponentially diminishing in form typical of the phenomenon of backscattering with superimposed peaks due to reflec tions from the ends of the fiber or other variations in the refractive index a4 R amp Ca No S se 2 we gt S gt r F oe lt 7 oe of ow G aeewanecaeanwas euweee PETEERE eocawnwunas gt s Attenuation dB eeceeeecce Distance km Fig 1 Trac
4. The trace showing the delay drift during the acquisition time A0 000 140lpS 28 000 PETES AB 11 000 Ope1pS city nent A Fig 57 Example of drift In Drift mode the cursor can be moved on each measurement by clicking on the key Previous Acq or Next Acq The histogram providing the delay value for each acquisition User Manual 780000102 16 149 Chapter 8 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement Statistics results 150 ivan Ag eee Teeny 44 amined ibm e ee Fig 58 Example of histogram Information Under the trace at the right hand corner a message indicates the current messages status of the trace or proposes the step to do next by clicking on Stop wait Signal acquisition This message indicates that an acquisition is in the process of being carried out To stop an acquisition whatever the mode is used press the START STOP button Then press either the button SETUP to go back to the Base Unit config uration menu or press the button START STOP to start a new identical acquisition Next measurement After each acquisition in the Statistic mode and when Long term has bee set on Period or Manual this message requests that you select Stop Wait The Base Unit then displays Signal Acquisition Push the START STOP button to stop the cycle if necessary Ready to make cycle This message appears after a acquisition cycle is terminated when you are in statistic mode Pr
5. Chapter 18 Technical specifications OFI plug ins OFI plug ins Bi directional loss specifications Specifications measured at 25 C mee NOTE This applies to the 81xx OFI modules To ensure optimal use bi directional measurement and communica tion two units are required Source function also valid for source mode 81xx OFI Module Laser type Wavelength at 25 C Nominal output level into 9 125 um fiber CW mode Class 1 laser 1310 20 nm 1490 3 nm 1550 30 nm 1625 5 nm 3 5 dBm Modulated output level 3 dB lower Level stability Short term 15 min AT 0 3 K 0 02 dB Long term 8 hours AT 3 K 0 2 dB 1 After 15 min warm up EO loss function 81xx OFI Module Dynamic range 60 dB Accuracy Loop back 0 25 dB without optical connection uncertainty Side by side 0 15 dB without optical connection uncertainty Display resolution 0 01 dB Type of detector InGaAs Type of fiber 9 um Precision of length measurement 1 5 3 to 200 km 1 After 15 minutes warm up User Manual 780000102 16 301 Chapter 18 Technical specifications Warning Optical Return Loss 81xx OFI Module ORL measurement display range Up to 65 dB For wavelengths 1310 nm 1490 nm 1550 nm and 1625 nm 60 dB with APC connector type Display resolution 0 01 dB Accuracy 0 5 dB t
6. Signal input socket on the OSA plug in Fig 54 PMD measurement with an external polarizer Performing a PMD measurement with a 81XXX plug in or an ODM plug in Remote operator Local operator The 81XXX and the ODM plug ins are equiped with an internal polarizer which is automatically switched on and off during referencing The refer ence is therefore done automatically by the Base Unit 1 Remove the protection cap on the OBS 55 and then connect the connector to the fiber link under test Press the ON OFF button to switch on the OBS 15 broadband source Keep pressure on the ON OFF button until the gt 2s PERM LED lights up The CW LED lights up while the green 1550 nm LED will flash for a few seconds before being steadily lighted Remove the dust cap from the Signal Input optical socket situated on the rear panel of the Base Unit to connect the fiber link you have connected to the OBS 55 as shown in the below diagram User Manual 780000102 16 145 Chapter 8 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement Display of results Select the PMD function in the Instrument Setup menu Press the SETUP button to access the Base Unit configuration menus 4 Select the appropriate PMD test setup according to your application as earlier defined in this chapter 5 Press the START STOP button to see the results within a few seconds 6 Repeat the PMD measurement for every fiber to be tested it will have to
7. About this guide xxi Purpose and scope 00e cece eee eee eens xxii ASSUMPUONS cic ccii a cece ta waa wede Spices soe xxii Technical assistance 0 2 ccc eee eee eee xxii Recycling Information 0 cc eee eee eee xxiii Conventions o 2 6 cece eee ninn xxiii Chapter 1 Principles of measurement 1 Principle of reflectometry measurements 2 Information yielded by the measurement 2 Validity of Measurement 0 000 ee eee eee 3 Reflectance soc cg ede pce eevee bee age eee tebea bees 3 Principle of bi directional measurement 4 Principle of WDM OSA analysis 0 0 008 5 Measurement results 0 0 0 cece ee 6 DFB analysis os s1c 08 cee meee pew eee Deka a EE eae 6 PMD principle sso cis cia katie aie aiaie eee utnermidieeees quan ae 7 Method used to measure the PMD 4 8 Principle of measurement of Chromatic Dispersion CD OTDR using pulse delay method 9 Method of CD measurement used by the Base Unit 12 Principle of measurement of Chromatic Dispersion CD ODM using phase shift method 13 User Manual 780000102 16 vii Table of Contents Principle of optical power and attenuation measurements OF eenean teeth edt erties ees Biehl ewes ee 13 Power measurement os senco tea ca eed eee eee eee 13 Attenuation measurements optical link loss 14 Standards a
8. 165 Recalling AP files 0002000 0c eaee 166 Chapter 10 CD measurements using pulse delay method 167 Configuring the instrument 05 168 Configuring the CD test 200000eeeeeee 168 Acquisition parameters 00 00 e eee eee 169 Parameters of analysis 00 eee ee 170 Results Screen parameters 0 171 Alarms 2 2 4 00 sand Poe ck ene tea Bea tae bles 171 1st analysis window 0 000 cee eee eee 172 Min wavelength 000 000 e eee eee eee 172 Max wavelength 0000 c eee eee eee 172 Inc wavelength 00 0 000 173 Normalized to KM 2 00 c eee eee 173 UNI an Se darned Oe ae ast Meg eae OE oe ONE E oina 173 Making a chromatic dispersion measurement 173 Measurement process 200000000 173 Conditions of measurement 55 173 User Manual 780000102 16 xiii Table of Contents CD acquisition mode 2000 0 eee eee 174 Automatic acquisition mode 20005 174 Manual acquisition mode 000000005 174 End of acquisition 0 0 00 c eee 175 Choice of CD result 0 000 cece eee eee 176 Return to this chosen screen 02 eee eee 176 Contiguration srai 0s ae beet oy bas ew Renee e 176 Information always displayed 05 176 Detection of end of fiber 02 0055 177 Functions
9. Display threshold of faults 0 to 5 99 dB in steps of 0 01 dB for event thresholds 11 to 99 dB in steps of 1 dB for the reflectance 0 to 1 99 dB km in steps of 0 001 dB km for slope Display of slope and attenuation for a segment of fiber Display of the position of a fault and of attenuation Display of the reflectance of the fault Display of ORL Measurement of slope between the cursors Measurement of attenuation between two segments of fiber Measurement of reflectance of a reflecting element Measurement of ORL between the two cursors Measurement of splice by 2 or 5 points method Weight approx 500 g 1 1 Ibs Dimensions in mm without front panel w x h x d 120 x 27 x 211 User Manual 780000102 16 285 Chapter 18 Technical specifications Reflectometer plug ins Typical The specifications provided below are valid wathever the wavelength specifications configuration single dual triple or quadruple wavelength of OTDR plug jquiti mode modules Ins Typical values measured at 25 C unless otherwise indicated Plug ins Multimode 81xxMM 81xxSRL Central Wave 850 1300 850 nm 1300 nm length 20nm 20nm 20nm 20 nm min IEC Dynamic min 20 dB min18dB min 20 dB min 18 dB Range 3 Typical RMS 25 dB 23 dB 24 dB 24 dB Dynamic Range Distance Range Up to 80 km Up to 80 km Pulse width 3 ns to 200 ns 3 ns to 300 ns Event Dead 1 5m 0
10. 00eeeeeeeeeee 309 References of optical connectors and adapters 309 Appendix A RoHS Information 311 Concerned products 8100 modules series 312 Concerned products OTDR 8100 Modules Series 313 Concerned products All OTDR VLR 8100 Modules Series 314 User Manual 780000102 16 xix Table of Contents Concerned products PMD and WDM 8100 Modules Series 315 Index 317 XX User Manual 780000102 16 About this guide The MTS TBERD series of JDSU provides a portable modular platform designed for the construction validation and maintenance of optical fiber networks The modules described in this document are applicable for the following platforms MTS 8000 T BERD 8000 MTS 6000 T BERD 6000 The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows Purpose and scope on page xxii Assumptions on page xxii Technical assistance on page xxii Recycling Information on page xxiii Conventions on page xxiii User Manual 780000102 16 xxi About this guide Purpose and scope Purpose and scope The purpose of this guide is to help you successfully use the MTS T BERD features and capabilities This guide includes task based instruc tions that describe how to install configure use and troubleshoot the MTS T BERD Additionally this guide provides a complete description of JDSU s warranty services and repair information including terms and conditions of the licens
11. 1490 1494 Min offset Max offset Fig 4 DFB measurements PMD principle The transmission rate and range are two of the most important parame ters of fiber optics paths and must therefore be optimized And since more and more paths including those already installed are being used for transmitting Wavelength Division Multiplex WDM signals or for bit rates of 10 Gbit s it is becoming all the more important to determine the Polarization Mode Dispersion PMD PMD which is the basic property of single mode fibers in particular affects the magnitude of the transmission rate It results from the differ ence in propagation times of the energy of a given wavelength which is split into two polarization layers that are at right angles to each other as shown in the below diagram The main causes of this birefringence are non circularities of the fiber itself and external stress on the fiber macro bending micro bending twist and temperature variations User Manual 780000102 16 7 Chapter 1 Principles of measurement PMD principle Method used to measure the PMD Vy Fig 5 Example of a time delay between two polarization layers The PMD is also referred to as mean value of all Differential Group Delays DGD in picoseconds ps or as the DGD coefficient in ps Vkm The mean DGD causes the transmission pulse to broaden when trans mitted along the fiber generating distortion which in turns increases the b
12. Auto calibration is not completed The OBS 55 or other source is not switched on The OBS 55 or other source battery is too low Defective connections Wait for the calibration to be terminated Press the ON OFF button to switch on the source verify if lt Make reference gt is still set to lt Yes gt then repeat step 2 Check if the LOW BATT red led is lighted If yes then recharge the battery Check that the cables are properly con nected and the notches on the connec tors are correctly aligned Performing a AP measurement When the reference measurement of the broadband source has been completed use the following procedure to make a measurement 1 Disconnect the coupler and connect each end to each extremity of the fiber 2 Press the SETUP button to access the Base Unit configuration menu 780000102 16 User Manual 161 Chapter 9 Attenuation profile Display of AP results 3 Select the appropriate AP test setup according to your application as earlier defined in AP Setup menu on page 156 4 Press the START STOP button to see the results within a few seconds 5 Repeat the AP measurement for every fiber to be tested it will have to be connected to the OBS 55 Signal input socket on the ODM plug in w NOTE You may modify the fiber length without performing a measurement again The AP result pro kilometer will be recalculated automatically Display of AP results The AP r
13. Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Table of results o End of launch cable the attenuation and distances are measured on the basis of the corresponding marker The distance of the event from the beginning of the fiber in metres or kfeet or miles The attenuation due to the event in dB The reflectance of the event in dB or the ORL result if an ORL measurement has been carried out The slope before the event in dB km dB kft if it can be measured The length of the section that is to say the distance between the marker of the event and the previous marker The total attenuation of the fiber total dB loss in dB The table of results is interactive and reflects the measurements in prog ress Any operation carried out on the trace is immediately entered in the table so that you can see the result The types of events are detected automatically as a function of their optical signature This can sometimes lead the system astray if reflection from a connector is too strong end of fiber if a splice has a very low insertion loss slope etc Similarly some types of events cannot be recognized automatically from their signatures for example couplers multiplexers etc For this reason it is advantageous in some cases to be able to change the type of events To do this Inthe Advanced menu select Manual measurement Select the Event Code button The modification of types
14. Chapter 8 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement PMD test setup menu Number of sweeps Number of acquisitions from 2 to 1000 Long term Wait period between two consecutive samples in statistics mode None samples are displayed one after the other Manual requires the user to press the Stop Wait button to start the next sample This mode is used for example if you wish to set the polarizer value between each acquisition Period A new line Wait becomes available when Yes is selected Wait Period The Wait Period parameter allows to enter a wait period before the measurement start onlyactive if Long Term is positioned on Period Increments of 5 seconds up to 1 minute then increments of 1 minute up to 10 minutes then increments of 5 minutes up to 60 minutes then increment of 1 hour up to 24 hours Known Length No If you do not know the fiber length select No Yes If you know the fiber length select Yes Fiber length If Yes has been selected on the previous line click on Edit Number to enter a value for the fiber length Min 0 100 km Max 20000 km The fiber length must be set to provide the PMD coefficient If the fiber length is not known then the results table will not display the 1st and 2nd order coefficient values see Figure 56 on page 147 Distance Unit When the fiber length is manually entered choose the distance unit Km Distance unit defined in kilometers Kfeet Distance unit de
15. mee NOTE It is not possible to affect the same function to different ports Functions that are offered by the same physical module may only be connected to the same port re Auto mode for the MTAU plug in on page 232 back to step 3 for the next function if necessary When the sequence is completely configured you can view which func tion is connected to which port thanks to all the solid links see the figure Auto mode for the MTAU plug in on page 232 Various link colors are offered to differentiate each port light blue for port A red for port B pink for port C dark blue for port D IMPORTANT A N If a function used in the sequence configuration is deselected in the SYSTEM page the configuration automatically deletes the corre sponding link but keeps the rest of the configuration in memory Rese lecting the function does not automatically recreate the link User Manual 780000102 16 233 Chapter 13 Multi Test Access Unit Auto mode me NOTE The last configuration is saved in the Base Unit and may be retrieved after a complete reboot unless the hardware configuration has changed for example if a new module is inserted Performing the 1 Connect the fiber to test to the MTAU common port sequence of 2 Click on START STOP to start the sequence tests 3 A message is displayed requesting to confirm you wish to start the measurement such as Start SM OTDR measurement Ans
16. 8100 Modules Series Portable modular platform designed for the construction validation and maintenance of optical fiber networks User Manual 8100 Modules Series Portable modular platform designed for the construction validation and maintenance of optical fiber networks User Manual y JDSU Notice Copyright Trademarks Manual WEEE Directive Compliance Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was accurate at the time of printing However information is subject to change without notice and JDSU reserves the right to provide an addendum to this document with information not available at the time that this document was created Copyright 2006 JDSU LLC All rights reserved JDSU Enabling Broadband and Optical Innovation and its logo are trademarks of JDSU LLC All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners No part of this guide may be reproduced or transmitted electronically or otherwise without written permission of the publisher JDSU is a trademark of JDSU in the United States and other countries Microsoft Windows Windows CE Windows NT MS DOS Excel Word and Microsoft Internet Explorer are either trademarks or registered trade marks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other coun tries Specifications terms and conditions are subject to change without notice All trademarks and registered trademark
17. Connections on page 230 Configuration on page 231 Manual mode on page 231 Auto mode on page 232 Use of the script specific client option on page 235 The main application of this module is to be used together with the 8000 platform User Manual 780000102 16 229 Chapter 13 Multi Test Access Unit Function of the MTAU module Function of the MTAU module The MTAU is a passive module switch used to route the signals from the different measurement plug ins to one and the same fiber The advantage is to be able for example to make all the characterization measurements insertion loss reflectometry chromatic dispersion spec trum and polarization measurements with a single Base Unit without ever disconnecting the fiber Connections 230 The MTAU plug ins offer a common port with 4 ports A B C and D The fiber to be tested must be connected to the common port The other ports are connected to the measurement plug ins e g OTDR CD OSA PMD or an external instrument Two Base Units can be used at each end of the link under test for maximum efficiency and to carry out the largest number of tests in both directions mes NOTE The MTAU is not directional It is possible to use the common port either as an input or as an output Inputs for connection to the different plug ins Output fiber under test Fig 101 MTAU plug in with 1 common amp 4 ports 1 Equipped with suitable plug ins
18. File management 02 eee ee eee eee eee 100 Storing OEO measurements 0 0 2 e eee 100 Recalling OEO traces 0 0 0 0 eee eee 101 Test of a cable 2222 05 cece es cei haast aiai iea 101 Troubleshooting 00 cece eee eee eee 102 Warning errors after pressing the key START 102 Warning errors resulting from checking common configurations 103 Chapter 7 Optical Spectrum Measurement 105 Configuration of the instrument 106 WDM OSA test configuration 5 106 Acquisition Parameters 000 eee eee eee 108 Measurement parameters 0 02000 00 00 110 Parameters of display and analysis of the results 113 Acquisition 200 c cece eee eee eee 116 Trace display functions 00 20 e eee eens 117 Display of the WDM OSA results 00 117 Table of results 0 eee eee eee ee eens 120 Channel filtering 200 c eee eee eee eee 124 Field of application 000002 eee eee 124 Configuration 0 0000 eee 124 Using channel filtering 22002 0055 125 Drift measurement 00 00 e ee eee eee eee 125 User Manual 780000102 16 xi Table of Contents EDFA results analysis 000 eee eee eeeeee 127 EDFA test configuration 22202 0055 127 EDFA measurements 0 000 cee eee eee ee 127 EDFA r sults en oiei a ah i
19. If you had entered Auto store then the results will be saved automati cally If not or if you want to store the results under another name directory etc 1 Click on the FILE key 2 Select Setup with the key Setup Explorer Link Mgr User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements File Management 3 Modify the parameters you want 4 Click on Store Trace The OTDR traces are stored with the extension SOR Recalling OTDR Once a OTDR file has been stored recall it using the Explorer files Select Explorer with the key Setup Explorer Link Mgr Using directions keys select the directory and then the file to open Click on Load Click on View Tace s or Load Trace Config The selected file is opened A O N For further informations on file management see Chapter 15 File management on page 245 User Manual 780000102 16 83 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements File Management 84 User Manual 780000102 16 Source option of the OTDR Modules According to your module the source option is available in two different ways either by pressing the Laser Source key onto the OTDR Setup page and selecting the source mode see page 48 or by selecting the icon Source on the System page This mode is described in this chapter A This option is not available for UHD and SR e modules The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows Source option on page 86 User Manual
20. Manual ORL A 224 The OFI module can be equipped with the ORL function option which allows to make an ORL manual measurement However before making this measurement the references have to be established once the ORL tab has been selected on the OFI module or on the Base Unit in the SYSTEM page Lad oe Ge e Fig 99 Selection of the ORL function The functions LTS FOX and ORL can be selected at the same time on the OFI module However the LTS and ORL functions from the Base Unit cannot be selected simultaneously User Manual 780000102 16 Establishing a reference for an ORL manual measurement A A Measurement acquisition Making the measurement Display of results for an ORL manual measurement Chapter 12 OFI Module Manual ORL Two steps must be carried out to take a reference for an ORL manual measurement 1 Power emitted reference see ORL Emitted power page 219 2 Zero ORL adjustment see ORL Zero adjustment page 220 Follow the order given above to take the reference They are not two different processes but two steps necessary to establish a reference for an ORL manual measurement Establishing references is only valid for a specific module or function For example the references for an ORL automatic measurement are only available for the FOX function a new reference must be redone for an ORL manual measurement Moreover the Manual ORL references made with the Base Unit are
21. No calibration of the measurement The choice offered depends on the range and pulse selected In Auto mode resolution is selected automatically according to the last two parameters above High Resolution the highest resolution is applied High Dynamic the highest dynamic is applied This parameter is exclusively configurable in Expert mode gt Manual Acquisition time Realtime the MTS T BERD 8000 performs up to ten acquisi tions per second and displays the resulting trace in real time together with an indicator of the state of the connection This mode makes it possible to analyze a fiber quickly without any memory effect and thus to check the establishment and quality of the connections mee NOTE Whatever is the acquisition mode selected an acquisition in real time mode can be launched maintaining the START STOP button pushed for about 2 seconds User Manual 780000102 16 49 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Configuring the reflectometry test 50 Manual Enter the acquisition time wished from 5 s to 5 minutes max Predefined Select one of the acquisition time predefined 10 seconds 20 seconds 30 seconds 1 minute 2 minutes 3 minutes Auto This mode is only available in Expert Mode when Auto configuration is selected Test Auto The Test Auto key imposes the following parameters Acquisition parameters Mode Auto Laser All Saving parameters see File management on page 2
22. The reflectance of a ghost event is displayed in brackets on the trace Events Trace Event functions Criteria for display of an event NOTE To display all the events make sure that the detection thresholds Splice and Reflection are positioned on All in the SETUP menu gt Detection To display the results on the trace make sure that the option selected in Results on Trace is All in the menu SETUP 1 The Trace function is useful in a multi trace display as the direction keys can then be used to select the active trace which turns green 2 The Event function of the MTS T BERD 8000 enables the cursor to be moved on to the faults that have been measured and the results of which are displayed on the screen After selecting the Event function on the Trace Event key pressing the keys A W 4 or gt once will move the cursor from one event to the next This function in association with Zoom and Cursor enables rapid analysis of the fiber NOTE While moving from one event to another the value of the zoom is con served unless this is impossible An event will be displayed if its attenuation or its reflectance exceeds the corresponding threshold selected in the SETUP menu see Acquisition parameters on page 47 Both results for an event will be displayed if they can be calculated The following table gives some examples of detection of events for different threshold values User Manual 780000102 16 63 Chapter
23. To define your own configuration choose the parameter to be modified using the direction keys then choose the option for this parameter with the keys lt and gt 168 User Manual 780000102 16 Acquisition parameters Chapter 10 CD measurements using pulse delay method Configuring the CD test Fiering Ao Window anahyiy 2530 san CODD o TEE aa Net waveleng 1550 am index Of Refraction 1400 Measure arve Link inc wavelength 3 000 Hormatoed to bam ves Una t Fig 66 Configuration of CD test The configuration parameters of the CD test are described below Laser Choose to carry out the acquisition either on one of the 4 wavelengths proposed 1310 1480 1550 or 1625 nm oron all the wavelengths All Mode Choose the mode of acquisition Manual Acquisition carried out on an analysis window of width 500 m positioned manually in the end of fiber zone or on a Fresnel its position must be defined by the following Analysis window parameter End of fiber End of fiber detected by a reflectometry measurement Auto After automatic detection of the end of the fiber a CD measurement is taken on all four wavelengths Analysis window In manual mode enter the distance of the reflective event to be analyzed Fresnel corresponding for example to the end of the fiber The param etrization value will correspond to the center of the analysis window Measurement time Choose t
24. clicking on the SETUP button directly opens the Reference setup page Fig 78 Setup CD Reference Measurement 3 In Make Reference select Yes using the direction keys lt q and gt The line BBS Serial Number turns active Enter a serial number for the broadband source used Press the button START STOP to start the reference of the broad band source A bargraph as this one mememe is displayed until the end of the acquisition Once the reference is correct the message Valid Reference is displayed in green and the information about this reference is displayed in the upper blue part of the screen date and time of reference acquisition BBS type and serial number User Manual 780000102 16 195 Chapter 11 CD measurements using phase shift method Performing a Reference measurement Reference f f information gt Reference validity Fig 79 a Example of a correct reference with measured points displayed If the reference measurement does not provide a correct result check the following points Error message Possible problem Possible solution Acquisition impossible Hit any key to continue Auto calibration is not completed Wait for the calibration to be completed Signal level too low Check source and con nections Hit any key to continue The source is not switched on The Source battery is too low Press the Source ON Source OFF button to switch on the source
25. min42dB min39qB n399B min 36 dB A 159 min 27 5 dB min 37 dB min 36 dB min 28 dB min IEC Dynamic min 45 dB min 37 dB A min 25 dB F min 37 dB min 33 5 dB min 26 5 dB min 42 dB min 38 5 dB R g min 37 dB min 33 5 dB min 38 dB 45 db 45 5 dB 44 dB sae 90 06 Typical RMS SR 35 33 dB 50 dB 42 dB 40 dB 40 dB 32 dB Dynamic Range SRe 34 32 dB 4 41 dB 38 dB 30 dB 45 5 dB 43 db 41 dB 37 dB 42 dB Distance Range up to 260 km up to 380km up to 380 km up to 380km up to 380 km up to 260 km Pulse width ene 10 ns to 20 us 3nsto20us 3nsto20us 3nsto20yus 10 ns to 10 us Event Dead Zone 3m 4 5m 0 8m 0 8 m 0 8 m 2 5m ws ta Dead 25m 15m 4m 4m 4m 8m one Continuous Vave 0 dBm 0 dBm 3 5dBm 3 5 dBm Output Power Modulated wave out put power Auto 6 5 dBm 6 5 dBm 270 330 1k 2k Hz 1 Laser at 10 us and 25 C 2 Guaranteed value corresponding to the one way difference in dB between the level of back diffusion extrapo lated at the beginning of the fiber and the level containing 98 of noise after 3 minutes of averaging with the largest pulsewidth according to IEC 61749 standard wo Typical value corresponding to the difference in dB between the level of back diffusion extrapolated at the beginning of the fiber and the RMS noise level after 3 minutes of averaging with the largest pulsewidth at 1310 nm NOS shortest pulsewidth User Manual 780000
26. 2 0 55 82 Recalling OTDR files 0002000020000 83 Chapter 5 Source option of the OTDR Modules 85 Source OPtlON sisii aa aaa ana erage ne erage eee we 86 Activating the Source fonction 0 86 Configuring and displaying the parameters of the source 86 Chapter 6 Bi directional OTDR 87 Definition of terms used 00 eee eee eee 88 Description of the measurement 205005 88 Summary of the automatic operation procedure 89 User Manual 780000102 16 x Table of Contents Configuration of bi directional measurement 90 Acquisition parameters 0 0 0 00 eee 90 Measurement parameters 0000 cece eee 91 Results Screen parameters 0 000 ee eee eee 91 Configuration of files parameters 91 Performing a bi directional measurement 92 Process Display 000 00 eects 92 Fiber link check 2 000 e ee eee eee eee 95 Measurement process 0 00000 0c eee eee 95 Trace display functions 000e eee e eee eee 97 Origin and End traces 0 0 cece eee 98 OEO trace ii 0 ite Pe eg eee BO RA 99 OEO Result table 0 00 c cee eee eee eee 99 Automatic measurement and Addition of markers in OEO PAG E A T E E E E 100 Key lt Del Res Auto Meas gt 0 000 eee eee 100 Addition of markers 1 2 0 0 0 aana 100 Markers display 00 cece eee eee eee 100
27. Cally If not or if you want to store the results under another name directory etc 1 Click on the FILE key 2 Select Setup with the key Setup Explorer 3 Modify the parameters you want 4 Click on Store Trace The Attenuation Profile traces are stored with the extension AP User Manual 780000102 16 165 Chapter 9 Attenuation profile File Management 166 Recalling AP Once an AP file has been stored recall it using the Explorer files 2 3 4 Select Explorer with the key Setup Explorer Using directions keys select the directory and then the file to open Click on Load Click on View Tace s or Load Trace Config The selected file is opened For further informations on file management see Chapter 15 File management User Manual 780000102 16 CD measurements using pulse delay method The 5083CD module the 50otdrExt extension makes available three functions CD analyzer Reflectometer Laser source The OTDR function is described in Reflectometry measurements on page 45 The source function is described in the chapter Source function on page 186 The Chromatic Dispersion analyzer function is described in all the rest of this chapter The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows Configuring the instrument on page 168 Configuring the CD test on page 168 Making a chromatic dispersion measurement on page 173 File Management on page 18
28. Ef E aA WAS RE Rb alt JSPR AS EY Eh ha FLL o IPR METE OU bas BG P in WEH FW SU ig D Pe i BY Be AE HE WY TES AAT WIR WM ERREA ABAD ARTE BOE Be i Pb K Hg fis Cd AUMA CR SHUKCK PBB ZRK PBDE EDL fo O fe fo EAE X O A KBA ER 0 fo fo ii as Be oO O Oo Oo Oo O EEA O oO O oO oO oO FEL Yt O ie O O Oo O TAJ O TE O O O DE O 6 0 O Oo O JERRI o Oo 0 O fe fe EIRIK EAL O WE Sh sc eH O O PRZE Oo 6 O O Oo oO HAE O Ab Pas E BE AE i BS O oO 0 oO Oo O i BK O O ANVE FUL AN ED M AEL fe KE AE O Fefe Mit O O RRA EA FF E A AE A YY JAB E EE SJ T11363 2006 X ERZA EA ESEE D E ARAE A A EE MA EEH SJ T11363 2006 312 User Manual 780000102 16 Appendix A RoHS Information Concerned products OTDR 8100 Modules Series Concerned products OTDR 8100 Modules Series 8111MM 8112MM 8114 DR HD SR SRE UHD VHD 8115 DR HD SR SRE UHD VHD 8117 HD HD RC VHD VHD RC 8123MM 8126 DR HD SR SRE UHD VHD 8129 UHD VHD 8136 HD UHD 81BBS 1 2 815MTAU 2 3 82PRINTER China RoHS HPs SP in RS al IN
29. Function of the BBS module on page 242 Activation process on page 242 Remote interlock connector on page 244 User Manual 780000102 16 241 Chapter 14 Broadband source BBS Function of the BBS module Function of the BBS module The BBS is a broadband source covering several wavelength ranges from 1260 to 1640 nm with the BBS2A It is used to measure the atten uation profiles the chromaticn dispersion and the PMD of optical fibers with a connection to an ODM module Activation process 242 To use the BBS function go into the SYSTEM menu and select the BBS icon E using the key 1 Go into the SETUP or RESULTS menu the same page is displayed for this plug in to access the screen of the BBS module 2 Press the SOURCE ON key Entrer the password 4877 using the direction keys E 4 Press the CONFIRM button to valid the password Password 4877 Valid Lesus eS ues Fig 113 Validate the password The laser is on and the screen displays the icon A 5 Press the SOURCE OFF ON key to activate the laser User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 14 Broadband source BBS Activation process mee NOTE To lock the instrument simply un select the BBS module Any user coming next will be prompted for a password when the module will be re selected After powering down the unit you will also be prompted for the pass word Fig 114 Configuration of the BBS2A 6 Select the type of me
30. If the CD Rom is a CD RW with data to be erased first click on Erase CD RW otherwise go to step 8 A dialog box request to confirm that you want to erase existing data Click Yes to continue A new message is displayed to inform you that all data is being erased on the CD RW Click on Burn CD or Burn and Close CD according to whether you wish to close the session of your CD or not A new dialog box is displayed asking you to check that the CD Rom door is securely closed A message is displayed to indicate that you need to wait the CD Rom is being burnt A last message appears a few minutes later to let you know that the CD Rom has now been successfully burnt Click on any key to remove the message 10 You may now securely remove the CD Rom User Manual 780000102 16 Macros The macro function allows to store series of user actions in order to play them back automatically The macro function is operational only while the Base Unit is used under the context of fiber optic applications meaning used with one of the following application selected OTDR OSA CD PMD AP LTS f Actions in the SYSTEM page will not be recorded A file macro may also be operational with no active modules as long as Standalone results for fiber optics is used and concerned files are fiber optics files The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows Calling the Macro function on page 272 Macro recordin
31. Level channel Yes No Max Level channel Yes No Min SNR 7 Yes No Channel number From 001 to the max number of channels Value of channel Display of the wavelength of the channel number selected Delta F8 From 0 to 2 THz 2 THz is the default value Min P From 80 dBm to 9 9 dBm below max threshold Max P12 From 79 9 dBm to 10 dBm above min threshold Min SNR From 0 to 50 dB 1 Max acceptable variation between max power and min power on all channels 2 Max acceptable variation between max SNR and min SNR on all channels 3 Maximum composite power 4 Wavelength drift Selection of the alarm on the basis of the value of delta F 5 The values are then defined in Min P 6 The values are then defined in Max P 7 The values are then defined in Min SNR 8 Delta of frequency 9 Minimum power 10 Maximum power User Manual 780000102 16 115 Chapter 7 Optical Spectrum Measurement Acquisition Wavelength range Parameter to set the display wavelength range NOTE The OSA xx modules always perform a measurement scan over the full wavelength range This parameter just sets the wavelength range to be displayed as a trace Mode Auto display automatically zooms into the the wavelength range where optical channels are present Full full wavelength range C L Band C L band wavelength range C Band C band wavelength range Start End manually selectable start end wavelengths
32. Lref Length of the fiber at the reference wavelength Fit Formula of approximation used The first seven lines of the table By selecting Table with the Trace Table key 20 lines of the of results are displayed with no trace On the upper blue banner of the table are displayed the values for LO Dispersion wavelength zero and So Slope associated with LO 180 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 10 CD measurements using pulse delay method Making a chromatic dispersion measurement Choice of curve If the delay curve was requested it will be possible to change over to the dispersion curve and add the slope curve to it Click on Add Slope Ifthe dispersion curve was requested it will be possible to add the slope curve and change over to the delay curve Ifthe slope curve was requested it will be possible to add the dispersion curve and change over to the delay curve When a curve is added the screen is divided so that both curves can be displayed mes NOTE If the table is displayed first it will disappear when the curve is added If it is desired to display or redisplay the table after addition of the slope curve the latter must first be erased by clicking on Exit or Delete Slope ret 1 70 Fest O01 1479 lant Of AVON th 15 em AB 10700m D 16 638 Amna S 0 07 pinn Mormalined Utspersion prtm ne ez Normatived Slepe pim mew me ies i CE Kl eed Peay Eat Jor mco oos
33. Unit of power 209 Options 303 ORL manual measurement OFI 224 measurement OTDR 75 on saturated trace OTDR 76 OTDR acquisition parameters 47 automatic acquisition 59 Configuration 46 manual acquisition 61 manual measurement ORL 75 manual measurements 72 measurement of slope 73 measurement of splice and re flectance 74 measurement parameters 50 multi wavelength acquisition 61 principle of measurement 2 Real time acquisition 56 results screen parameters 54 table of results 64 contents 66 notes 68 uncertainty 69 OTDR Bi dir acquisition parameters 90 adding markers 100 cable test 101 file management 100 measurement parameters 91 OEO results 99 OEO traces 99 Origin and end traces 98 performing measurement 92 troubleshooting 102 Overlay traces adding 41 display 41 removing 43 Overlaying traces WDM 124 P PMD abacus 152 319 acquisition parameters 138 configuration 136 Display of results 147 graphic display 149 information messages 150 local operator 142 measurement parameters 139 Measurement procedure 144 method used 8 principle of measurement 7 reference measurement 141 remote operator 141 results screen parameters 140 Spectrum FFT 146 standards and limits 152 statistics 149 PMD coefficient 9 Printer exposing 280 loading paper 281 module function 280 printing page 282 setting 282 R Ref power power meter 213 Reference trace 80 Reflectance definition 3
34. dispersion offset dispersion non zero or homogeneous offset dispersion 1310 nm zone Sellmeier 3 term Sellmeier 5 term Sellmeier 5 term 1550 nm zone Complete curve Sellmeier 5 term Sellmeier 5 term Quadratic Sellmeier 5 term Sellmeier 5 term Sellmeier 5 term User Manual 780000102 16 15 Chapter 1 Principles of measurement Standards and l0 for different types of fiber 16 User Manual 780000102 16 Getting started The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows Adapting MTS 5000 series plug ins on page 18 Universal connectors and adapters on page 19 Installing a new version of the software on page 21 User Manual 780000102 16 17 Chapter 2 Getting started Adapting MTS 5000 series plug ins Adapting MTS 5000 series plug ins The plug ins of the MTS 5000 series are shorter than those of the 8100 series Before they can be used in the Base Unit an extension must be fitted ref E500TDRext for OTDR plug ins E507Xext for WDM plug ins To attach this extension remove the two screws on the plug in marked a below connect the extension to the rear of the plug in and fix the screws back in stick the adhesive label supplied with the extension on to the upper surface of the assembly to hold the two elements securely together MTS 5000 series plug in Fixing screws a Extensions Fig 10 Mounting the e
35. for example an OTDR CD plug in and a WDM PMD plug in User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 13 Multi Test Access Unit Configuration Configuration To use the MTAU function go into the SYSTEM menu and select the icon using the key Then go into the SETUP or RESULTS menu the same page is displayed for this plug in to access the screen from which the the input channels can be switched The screen displays a diagram of the input and outputs to the switching device Switching button Common port Port B Port D Uisa josin i an Erco E Duri Fig 102 Manual mode for the MTAU plug in Manual mode To switch each output use the button Port A Port B Port C Port D Each click on this button switches the next output port The active port and the link to the common port are shown green while the other ports remain grey NOTE To optimize manipulation always use the RESULTS key to change over from this screen to the screen corresponding to each measure ment User Manual 780000102 16 231 Chapter 13 Multi Test Access Unit Auto mode Auto mode The auto mode offers the best way to test a full cable The purpose is to set a sequence of operations which will be performed for each fiber one after the other with no need to modify the configuration or to go to each measurement tab All operations can be handled from the MTAU tab mes NOTE The switch between measurement if necessary is automatic N
36. if 3 traces are displayed in overlay and File type is set on sor files than 3 files with the extension sor will be saved One msor file all the traces opened in overlay will be saved in one single file with the msor extension Example if 3 traces are displayed in overlay and the File Type param eter is set on One msor file then one single file will be saved with the extension msor This paragraph gives the fiber information for the extremity defined in Direction If the direction is O gt E then the fiber information concerns the origin If the direction is E gt O it concerns the extremity NOTE The information entered in the Fiber information window concerns the editing and or modifications of the cable and fiber parameters When a trace is recalled without recalling its configuration the parameters of this trace will be present only in its signature User Manual 780000102 16 249 Chapter 15 File management File configuration menu Fiber ID and Fiber The Fiber Id menu consists of an alphanumerical part entered by means Number of the edit menu followed by the fiber number This number is automati cally incremented or decremented as a function of the fiber code Color code The color code corresponds either to the fiber number or to a color code according to the choice made in Cable structure gt Color Coding If a color code is selected it can consist of the codes for the tube the ribbon and the fiber itself Its
37. nection User Manual 780000102 16 Warning errors resulting from checking common configurations Chapter 6 Bi directional OTDR Troubleshooting No common laser acquisi tion is impossible Select a Base Unit equiped with the same type OTDR plug in Lasers are different Do you want to continue Yes measurement will occur using selected lasers common to both Base Units No measurement is stopped Acquisition configs are differ ent Transfer config to remote Yes the SETUP configuration is transferred and applied on the remote Base Unit No no configuration transfer the measurement is stopped File configs are different Transfer config to remote Yes the FILE configuration is transferred and applied to the remote Base Unit No no configuration transfer the measurement is stopped Acquisition and files configs are different Transfer config to remote Yes The SETUP and FILE config urations are transferred and applied on the remote Base Unit No no configuration transfer the measurement is stopped User Manual 780000102 16 103 Chapter 6 Bi directional OTDR Troubleshooting 104 User Manual 780000102 16 Optical Spectrum Measurement This chapter describes the different stages in carrying out a spectrum analysis of an optical signal or analyzing effects from an optical amplifier EDFA type by a Base Unit equipped with a 507XXX series module and a 5
38. system back within the permissible limits of CD Telcordia gives their specifications in the document entitled GR 2854 CORE Generic Requirements for Fiber Optic Dispersion Compensators User Manual 780000102 16 OFI Module This chapter describes the functions of the OFI module Optical Fiber Installation and its use The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows OFI module on page 206 Selection of the OFI module on page 206 LTS function on page 206 FOX Function on page 214 Manual ORL page 224 File Management on page 226 User Manual 780000102 16 205 Chapter 12 OFI Module OFI module OFI module The OFI module is used to make insertion loss measurements ORL measurements and distance measurements The following functions are available with the OF Module Loss Test Set FOX Fiber Optic eXpert Selection of the OFI module Push the SYSTEM button Select the icon E to start the LTS function and or the icon to start the FOX function or the icon E to start the ORL function using the key LTS function Principle of the optical power and attenua tion measure ments Power A power meter is all that is needed to measure emitted or received measurement power to measure emitted power connect the power meter directly to the output of the optical emitter to measure the power at the input of an optical receiver the power meter is connec
39. used for the Pass Fail indication LO zero dispersion wavelength So Slope at LO Wavelength key To move the cursor from one wavelength to the next one press the Wavelength key and use the arrow keys and W or q and p The cursor will move both on the trace and in the table User Manual 780000102 16 201 Chapter 11 CD measurements using phase shift method File Management File Management Storing CD measurements Recalling reference or CD measurement files 202 If you had configured Auto store then the results will be saved automat ically If not or if you want to store the results under another name directory etc 1 Click on the FILE key 2 Select Setup with the key Setup Explorer Fiber Info 3 Modify the parameters you want 4 Click on Store Trace softkey The Chromatic Dispersion results are stored with the extension ocd The Reference measurement and the CD measurement files have both the extension ocd but can be differentiated by the information displayed in the File signature on upper part of the screen Jote tOOO7 113 i nipp boa hae A 1560 2000m 22 Reference File Signature Leim FR Seo 1 pq7 bost0 s0kma 4 AC SAS N66nn 686 8 Measurement File Signature Fig 85 File Signature for Reference and CD measurement Once a CD file has been stored it can be recalled using the Explorer Select Explorer with the key Setup Explorer Fiber Info Using directions keys select th
40. verify if Make reference is still set to Yes then repeat step 3 Check if the LOW BATT red led is lighted If yes then recharge the bat tery Defective connections The CD mode has not been selected on the source Check that the cables are properly con nected and the notches on the con nectors are correctly aligned Saving a reference measurement 196 When the reference measurement of the broadband source has been completed you can save the result on the hardidsk or disk of the Base Unit used 8000 or 6000 Platform Proceed as follow User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 11 CD measurements using phase shift method Performing a Chromatic Dispersion Measurement 1 Click on the FILE button 2 Select Setup 3 Enter a filename for this reference or click on Default Filename to apply a name by default to the reference measurement The file has the extension OCD but differs from the CD measure ment result files as it only contains the reference points the informa tion on the upper part of the screen are different See Storing CD measurements on page 202 Loading The last reference acquisition performed with the Base Unit may be existing different than the reference used by the curve actually open reference in this case the Acquisition Ref menu will be different than the Curve Menu in the Reference setup page Fig 80 Acquisition Reference and Curve Reference You can replace one re
41. 0 1 nm Minimum length 1km Dynamic Range 33 dB Zero dispersion wavelength uncertainty n a 4 5 nm Zero dispersion wavelength repeatability n a 0 4 nm Dispersion Uncertainty 34 0 06 ps nm km 0 3 ps nm km Dispersion Repeatability 2 0 02 ps nm km Measurement Time From 10s to30s over 20 measurements 1530 1570nm band Excluding reference fiber uncertainties User Manual 780000102 16 With Broadband Source wavelength type OBS500 1460 1625 nm Repeatibility refers to the typical one sigma standard deviation value obtained for system cycling 297 Chapter 18 Technical specifications Information on fiber plug ins 5020TF and 82LFSM2 82LFSM4 Polarization Mode Dispersion 45 dB 0 08 to 130 ps 0 02 ps 2 PMD 0 025 ps 8 seconds independant of PMD value Dynamic Range DGD Measurement range DGD Type B uncertainty DGD Repeatability 3 Measurement Time With averaging Up to 60ps in strong mode coupling Weak coupling for 0 1 ps to 60 ps DGD range up to 35 dB budget loss traceable to NPL standard Minimum value without averaging RON Attenuation Profile Dynamic Range 45 dB Wavelength Uncertainty 0 1 nm Measurement uncertainty 0 003dB km 1550nm 0 004dB km 1625nm Measurement Time 3 seconds 1 Measured with 80km G 652 fiber Information on fiber plug ins 5020TF a
42. 3 minutes of averaging with the largest pulsewidth according to IEC 61749 standard 2 Typical value corresponding to the difference in dB between the level of back diffusion extrapolated at the beginning of the fiber and the RMS noise level after 3 minutes of averaging with the largest pulsewidth 3 EDZ measured at 1 5 dB below the peak of a non saturated reflecting event at shortest pulsewidth 4 ADZ measured at 0 5 dB on the basis of a linear regression from a reflectance of type FC UPC 55 dB at shortest pulsewidth User Manual 780000102 16 295 Chapter 18 Technical specifications ODM plug ins ODM plug ins Specifications of ODM Optical Dispersion Measurement plug ins Typical values measured at 25 C unless otherwise specified Chromatic Dispersion specifications 80km G652 10km G655 Wavelength Acquisition Range 1260 1640 nm Wavelength Uncertainty 0 1 nm Minimum length 1km Dynamic Range 45 dB 55 dB Zero dispersion wavelength uncertainty 1 5nm Zero dispersion wavelength repeatability 0 1 nm Dispersion Uncertainty 5 0 05 ps nm km 0 1 ps nm km Dispersion Repeatability gt 4 0 005ps nm km Slope at Zero Wavelength Repeatability 3 0 5 0 1 Measurement Time From 40s to 80s 1 With Broadband Source module E81BBS2A unless specified 2 With handheld Broadband Source OBS550 in High Dynamic mode 3 Repeatibility refers to the typical one
43. 30ns 100ns 300ns 1 us 3us 10 us 20 us 5 km x x 10 km x x x 20 km x x x x x 40 km x x x x x x x x 80 km x x x x x x x x 140 km x x x x x x x 260 km x x x x x 380 km x x WDM plug ins Typical Typical specifications measured at 25 C unless otherwise indicated specifications of WDM plug ins Plug in 81WDM Module Plug in 81WDMPMD Module S C L O E 8S C L Wavelength Range 1485 1640 nm 1260 1640 nm Duration of sweep in real time 1 55s 3s Accuracy 10 pm Resolution of display 1pm Minimum interval between chan 10 GHz 80 pm nels Optical Bandwidth FWHM 30 pm Power Range of display 90 dBm at 30 dBm Resolution of display 0 01 dB Channel measurement range 79 dBm at 10 dBm Noise floor 86 dBm Max permissible power before signal cut off total 20 dBm per channel 10 dBm 292 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 18 Technical specifications PMD plug ins Plug in 81WDM Module Plug in 81WDMPMD Module S C L O E S C L Accuracy in power 0 5 dB max Linearitye S T 02B Flanessy T 0 2dB Dependence on polarization 0 05 dB 0 15 dB ORL Optical Return Loss 35 dB ORR Optical Rejection Ratio 35 dB at 50 GHz from the carrier 40 dB at 100 GHz from the carrier ONOARWONS max resolution from 40 dBm to 5 dBm in the range of 1525 1620 nm in the range of 1525 1570 nm 1550 nm with averaging 75 dBm without
44. 780000102 16 85 Chapter 5 Source option of the OTDR Modules Source option Source option Activating the The Source function is an option chosen at the time of order and incor Source fonction porated into the OTDR module in the factory To activate the function Press the SYSTEM button Use the direction keys to select the Source icon section of the OTDR Module framed in green _ Press the validation key The icon is selected in the Configuring Once the source icon is selected click on the SETUP or RESULTS button and displaying to display the result page and to configure the source the parameters of the source 270Hz A 1 3 1 0 nm F Laver Of F Laser On Fig 35 Configuration of the source Laser On Laser Off Activation or shut down of the laser same function as the START STOP button When the laser is on the icon A is displayed The parameters of the source can be accessed directly on the result screen by pressing the Source Config soft key Wavelength To change the wavelength when a multi wavelength source is present depending on option The wavelength value is displayed Mode To vary the mode of emission of the source Possible modulation values are 270 Hz 330 Hz 1 kHz 2 kHz CW continuous emission Auto 86 User Manual 780000102 16 Bi directional OTDR This chapter describes the different steps to perform an automatic bi direc
45. Ak H H Bld We as RERE FEE BE m ERRE ih BE A EE AFK i 299 Ts ads PTF FY BN RRE FD Re IF ese A AE BR EAEN A BEA EWR RER BMI ME AARNE Fe ih Ai A o TE FS OBR AE TE Oe td Sr oh FS BE FA EP H PNE D A hh A SME THE WUE AS AEA RA RB ERRER ABE WAM HS EE BK th Pb K Hg 4 Cd KMKR 2 iRKE PBB EA tee a PBDE EL fe fe r0 le Pin res BA PEHE fo fo 0 lo Lan Dit BER fo Et ERR 0 re 7 0 EE pE le TBD X Fe Db re BE AE Oo O O O 0 O SEL ob eB A O O O 0 0 O ne BAA O 0 0 fo fe fe Sh Pas E i AU aE AC AS oO O O O o fe JEK fe 0 fo fe 0 0 FEME FEAU ER ipl Y H ie O O 0 O 0 RADIA Efta B 4 Q O O O O O O KRZA E EA RE A E A H A EE H E EE SJ T11363 2006 X KRZA RA EW BD EARE E By OE BY eH SJ T11363 2006 314 User Manual 780000102 16 Appendix A RoHS Information Concerned products PMD and WDM 8100 Modules Series Concerned products PMD and WDM 8100 Modules Series 81PMD 81WDM 81WDMPMD China RoHS FEL fis AAP Yo BR aE Hl FB Dp YK fa EPL 39 5 JE BY ae Be BE China ROHS ZSR pI 7 ih Sh BE AD SU BR A 8 EE AS a a J PE BLANEY BA HE o Pein 4 PK XX
46. Center Span manually selectable center span Table Notes Here the display can be configured and it can be specified whether or not it is possible to enter a note for each channel see Table notes p 123 Select Manual to enter manually a note for each channel in the results table Select ITU Ch to automatically enter the TUchannel on each channel displayed in the results table Units Here the units of the x axis can be selected Frequency in THz Wavelength in nm Acquisition 116 To start a measurement press START key The OSA XXX will scan over the entire wavelength range and the measurement result will be displayed in graphical and tabular format 1 Fast acquisition not available for OSA xxx modules press the START key and hold it down for some time 2 Normal acquisition press the START key briefly User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 7 Optical Spectrum Measurement Trace display functions Only Normal acquisition mode operates with modules OSA XXX When acquisition is complete an automatic measurement is performed Trace display functions Display of the WDM OSA results The trace acquired or recalled from a memory is displayed on the Results page see example Figure 16 on page 32 A range of functions enable modifications to the display of the trace Cursors Zoom Shift Event Trace Trace Table Full scale etc See Functions relating to display of a trace p 37 See Ov
47. Chapter 19 Options and accessories References of measurement plug ins References of measurement plug ins OTDR Modules Multimode Module Multimode plug ins Reference Multimode High Resolution 850 1300nm E8123MM Short Range LAN 25dB 850 nm E8111SRL Short Range LAN 23 dB 1300 nm E8112SRL Short Range LAN 25 23 dB 850 1300 nm E8123SRL Singlemode Module SRe plug ins Reference Short distance 34 dB 1310 nm E8114SRe Short distance 32 dB 1550 nm E8115SRe Short distance 34 32 dB 1310 1550 nm E8126SRe SR plug ins Reference Short distance 33 dB 1310 nm E8115SR Short distance 35 dB 1550 nm E8114SR Short distance 35 33 dB 1310 1550 nm E8126SR UHD plug ins Reference Ultra long distance 1550 nm E8115UHD Ultra long distance 1310 1550 nm E8126UHD Ultra long distance 1550 1625 nm E8129UHD Ultra long distance 1310 1550 1625 nm E8136UHD OTDR plug in for calibration reports Reference OTDR plug in for calibration ratios E810TDRCR 1 Supplied with its manual E8100MOX X depends on language Specify optical connector of each OTDR plug in Oblique universal connector not available on 812XMM OTDR plug ins 304 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 19 Options and accessories References of measurement plug ins VLR plug in Reference Very Long Range 42 dB 1625 nm OTDR plug in E8117VLR Very Long Range 42 dB 1625 nm OTDR
48. Known Length 192 parameters No If you do not know the fiber length select No Yes If you know the fiber length select Yes Fiber Length If Yes has been selected in the preceeding parameter enter here the fiber length Min 1 km Max 20000 km If the fiber length is not known the values for Dispersion Coefficient will not be displayed in the results table Distance Unit When the fiber length is manually entered choose the distance unit km kfeet miles Approx formula Select the approximation formula to be used for generation of the disper sion and slope curves Please refer to ITU T G 650 1 or IEC 60793 1 42 for further information Quadratic A BA Ca 2 Recommended for G 653 fibers in the 1550 nm area Sellmeier 3 term A Bi2 C27 2 Recommended for G 652 fibers in the 1310 nm area Sellmeier 5 term A Bi2 Ca72 D24 EA Recommended in all other cases including non homogeneous fibers Select the approximation formula Sellmeier 3 term when the ODM Module is used with an OBS 550 Lambda Log A BA C In A see Most suitable method of approximation according to trace zone on page 15 You can also configured automatically the approximation formula which will be used by selecting Auto Amplified link Selet Yes or No wether an amplified link is used or not for the test see Performing a CD measurement through amplifiers on page 198 User Manual 780000102 16 Results Screen parameters Alar
49. Param OTDR CD OTDR CD ODM amp OEO ist Alarm status icon amp Fiber number 2nd Direction 3rd Lambda Length Length Nb Channel Length Length Length Ath Total LO LO Power Max Delay 1 AP L1310 Loss 1310 nm 5th Fiber SO SO Power Min Coeff 1 AP L1550 Length 1650 nm 6th Nb of Dispersion Dispersion OSNR Max Delay 2 AP L1625 Event at 1550 nm at 1550 nm 1625 nm User Manual 780000102 16 267 Chapter 15 File management Link Manager Function Table 2 Fiber Information displayed OTDR CD OTDR CD ODM OSA PMD AP FOX Param amp OEO 7th Max Coeff at OSNR Min Coeff 2 01310 Splice 1550 nm 8th Total 01550 ORL 9th OP162 5 Editing function The same editing functions as those from the Explorer are available with 268 the Link Manager function Directory Copy or cut Paste Rename Delete see Directory edit function on page 260 and burn on CD see CD Rom burning MTS T BERD 8000 only on page 269 File s Copy Cut Rename Delete see File editing function on page 261 except the merging function as this is used with txt files Moreover the Edit menu from the Fiber Info function allows to export the whole directory with the files corresponding to the active tab in a txt file To export a directory Select the Link Manager function Select the tab corresponding to the files you want to use
50. Rename Dir gt Renames the directory selected An editor enables replacement of its current name lt Edit gt Opens a new menu providing functions for editing the directories Copy Cut Paste Delete and Merge mee NOTE A whole directory with its contents can be copied into another direc tory or on to another storage medium File editing The right hand part of the screen can be used to work on the files in the function directory selected A table gives the list of the files in the directory showing for each one its name size type and date of creation For files recognized by the Base Unit the types are symbolized by icons User Manual 780000102 16 261 Chapter 15 File management Explorer Function OSA file OSA extension OTDR file SOR extension OEO file OEO extension PMD file PMD extension CD OTDR file CD extension AP file AP extension LTS file LTS extension ORL file ORL extension S g D Ji BH HEB CD ODM file OCD extension Format of files OTDR files that can be read by the Base Unit are type Bellcore 1 0 1 1 and 2 0 Other files that can be read by the Base Unit are specific to this instru ment To read other formats use JDSU s FiberTrace or FiberCable software Easy file selection The direction keys are used to position the cursor on the file to be selected Multiple selection Itis possible to select several files simultaneously to move them delete of files pri
51. analyzes two traces at the same time Go back to the Table or Trace function to have access to these functions i In Summary mode there is neither access to the events function nor To scroll through the table if it contains more than 8 lines either select the Cursors function and move the selected cursor along the trace using the keys and gt User Manual 780000102 16 65 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Table of results or select the Event function and move the cursor through the table using the keys A and W Jime Slee e A RAG he Tr A Ireen C2 8 51 he eee At 1700430m 0731 dite bs 9 089dB a Q Dm Fig 28 Example of table of results Information Each event is referenced under the trace by a serial number which is provided for epeated in the first column of the table The table then shows each event an icon symbolizing the type of the event detected Non reflecting attenuation e g splice Event with reflection e g connector Ghost reflection Slope of the fiber when no fault follows the slope End of fiber ORL measurement Event marker when a measurement cannot be carried out If the event to be added is too close to an existing event the icon appears on the trace and the table but no measurement is carried out to obtain the results for this event a manual measurement is necessary PAE 66 User Manual 780000102 16 Modifying types of events A
52. and noise figure o configure the Base Unit in preparation for an test press the EDFA test To confi he Base Unit i ion for an EDFA h configuration SETUP button In the Measurements section set Type on EDFA Other SETUP parameters are the same for EDFA as for WDM measure ments Refer to WDM OSA test configuration p 106 for a complete description mes NOTE If your Base Unit is equipped with an OSA201 you may use the two ports to test before and after the EDFA In this case make sure you select Port A B for Input Port EDFA Measurement procedure using one port measurements If only one port is selected the Base Unit is ready to perform the Acq in signal before being amplified by EDFA Connect your Base Unit to your fiber before the EDFA Click START STOP to perform the first acquisition Switch to Acq Out Connect your Base Unit to your fiber after the EDFA Click START STOP to perform the second acquisition Results appear automatically in the table User Manual 780000102 16 127 Chapter 7 Optical Spectrum Measurement EDFA results analysis 128 EDFA results Select which trace to view Select which acquisition you are working on ane He tiene nee Fig 46 EDFA measurements Measurement procedure using two ports If two ports are selected the Base Unit will perform both Acq In and Acq Out in one step Connect your Base Unit to your fiber before the EDFA
53. be connected to the OBS 55 j Fiber under test i Jumper OBS 55 Signal input socket on the ODM plug in Fig 55 PMD measurement with an ODM plug in Display of results Spectrum FFT The key Spectrum FFT enables you to display menu key either the spectrum representing the power in dBm according to the frequency in THz or wavelength in nm according to setup configuration orthe FFT curve and PMD information delay amp coefficient according to the Fast Fourier Transform Method The FFT trace represents the PMD delay in ps 146 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 8 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement Display of results Display of PMD The PMD results screen presents zones from the top to bottom results displaying the file name if the result is stored in the memory characteristics specific to PMD test module name number of acqui sitions used for the statistics Acq wavelength range 1525 1610 fiber number N fiber length in defined unit date and time of acqui sition the trace with the scale and the method in the right top corner the results associated with cursors A and or B according to their selection amessage giving the acquisition in progress status or requesting to make the next step the table of results PMD delay and coefficient PMD2 delay and coefficient This table has only one line if statistics have not been selected when configuring th
54. composition is defined in Cable Structure gt Cable Content Fiber Nbr in Fiber Nbr Increment mode the fiber code is automatically incre Increment mented at each new file save Incrementation is done as a function of the max number of fibers tubes and ribbons defined in Cable Structure Max Tubes Max Ribbon Max Fibers the composition of the color code always incrementing first the fiber number then the ribbon number then if applicable the tube number the choices made for each color code in Cable Structure Tube Coding Ribbon Coding Fiber Coding and in Code Defi nition see Cable structure on page 252 The fiber number may be incremented or decremented directly with keys 4 and gt or using the numeric keypad me NOTE The Fiber Code and the fiber number concatenated with Fiber Name are interdependent they are incremented or decremented at the same time However the fiber number remains a number only while the fiber code is alphanumerical Whether it includes a color code or not see Cable structure on page 252 it may be composed of one two or three parts see figure page 251 250 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 15 File management File configuration menu Fiber Name Fib Fiber and cable parameters used in the example Cable Content Tube Fiber erx Max Tube 12 Max Fiber 24 Coding used for the fiber and the tube TIA F
55. con nections Hit any key to continue Press the ON OFF button to switch on the OBS 55 verify if Make reference is still set to Yes then repeat step 6 Check if the LOW BATT red led is lighted If yes then recharge the bat tery The OBS 55 is not switched on The OBS 55 battery is too low Defective connections Check that the cables are properly connected and the notches on the connectors are correctly aligned Performing the When the reference measurement of the broadband source has been measurement completed the polarizer replaces the coupler Use the following procedure to make a measurement 1 Remove the two protection caps on the OVP 15 2 Disconnect the coupler and connect the cables to the OVP 15 Either connector on the OVP 15 can be used 3 Set the OVP 15 polarization angle to 0 any polarization angle would be acceptable however it is preferable not to change it 4 Press the SETUP button to access the Base Unit configuration menus 5 Select the appropriate PMD test setup according to your application as earlier defined in this chapter 6 Press the START STOP button to see the results within a few seconds 7 Repeat the PMD measurement for every fiber to be tested it will have to be connected to the OBS 55 144 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 8 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement Performing a PMD measurement with a 81XXX plug in or an ODM plug in
56. default macro 00000 275 How to set a macro as default 00 275 Macro playback 0 eee e eee e eee eee 276 Storing A MACrO 1 eee 277 Chapter 17 Printer 279 Function of the printer module 2 280 Exposing the printer 0 0 0 0 0 cenia tiie eee 280 Releasing the printer back into the module 281 Loading a new paper roll 00 eee e ee eeeee 281 Setting up the printer 2 cee eee eee 282 Printing a page 2 e eee eee eee eee 282 Chapter 18 Technical specifications 283 Reflectometer plug ins 0 00e eee e eee 284 Characteristics of reflectometry measurements 284 Measurement of distance 0000 0 ee aee 284 Measurement of attenuation 000 284 Measurement of reflectance 0 000005 284 Automatic measurement 00 0s eee eee 285 Manual Measurement 00 020 cee eee eee 285 OTDR plug ins measurement 0 00005 285 Typical specifications of OTDR plug ins 286 Classes of the lasers of the OTDR plug ins 288 R ngeS ari eta eek Shee rh a ete EN ES 289 CWDM OTDR Modules 000 291 Technical Specifications 0 0 0 0 c eee eee 291 Ranges for CWDM OTDR plug ins 292 WDM plug ins iiaii aie nara eet kc 292 xviii User Manual 780000102 16 Table of Contents Typical speci
57. ee atiwe twe i B Fig 68 Detection of end of fiber Functions lt Start CD measure gt To start the CD measurement available If an OTDR acquisition is in progress the key START CD A N MEASURE is not displayed User Manual 780000102 16 177 Chapter 10 CD measurements using pulse delay method Making a chromatic dispersion measurement lt Cursor A Cursor B gt To displace cursor A and or B use the Cursor key Cursor A Cursor B to select the cursor or cursors then use the keys and gt lt Zoom Shift gt To shift the trace horizontally or vertically press this key to display Shift then use the keys and gt until the desired shift is attained lt Change window gt You can change the position of the analysis window centered on the cursor in which a Fresnel peak is present due to a connector for example To do this position the cursor then press the Change window key to confirm your choice The message Analysis window centered at x xx km is updated Placing of markers After acquisition on the 4 wavelengths if the markers have not been automatically placed on the basis of the result screen press the Config key to position them manually Wavelength of the active trace ened 8 389dB Essu ODA PESDA OOc tears Fig 69 Placing markers Information The configuration screen of the markers displays the general information displayed for the see Information always displayed on pa
58. eee 212 Commands of the power meter parameters 212 Making a measurement 000 eee eee eee 213 Power measurement 000 ee eee eee 213 Optical link loss ecus iia eee 213 FOX Function 000 20 e eee eee eee 214 Configuration of the FOX automatic measurement 214 Acquisition parameters 000000e ee eee 215 Results screen parameters 000 00005 215 File Storage parameters 0 000 cee eee eee 216 Establishing a reference 22000 0005 216 Establishing a reference for loss measurement 217 Taking a side by side reference 05 217 Taking the reference in a loop back mode 218 Establishing a reference for an ORL measurement 219 ORL Emitted power 2 0 0 0 cece eee eee 219 ORL Zero adjustment 0 0 0 cc eee eee ee 220 Measurement acquisition 2 200 0055 220 Choosing the fiber to be tested 0005 221 Making the measurement 000 0 0055 221 User Manual 780000102 16 Xv Table of Contents Identifying the distant module 222 Displaying results for a FOX automatic measurement 222 Sending a message 0 00 e eee eee eee 223 Manual ORL ime itn biotite enter tite wits tes 224 Establishing a reference for an ORL manual measurement 225 Measurement acquisition 2 20020005 225 Making the measurement
59. eee 261 Format of filles 0 000 cece eee eee 262 Easy file selection 0 0 0 0 cece eee nes 262 Multiple selection of filles 0 000000 eee aes 262 Commands relating to files 0000005 263 Saving Files from the Explorer 005 264 Loading files and displaying traces 265 Simple loading 00 eee 265 Load with configuration 0 00 c eee eee 265 Load Trace Info with OTDR files only 266 Display of several traces in overlay 0 266 Link Manager Function 002eeeeeeeeee 266 Editing TUnCtiOn ssi eve ek Steed cake Anes Saving ater eles 268 CD Rom burning MTS T BERD 8000 only 269 Chapter 16 Macros 271 Calling the Macro function 200e ee eeee 272 User Manual 780000102 16 xvii Table of Contents Macro recording 0 0ce cece eee eee e eee 272 Standard macro 6 eee 272 File Macros ii seak ites yc A n ai 273 Adding interaction to your macro 274 Inserting a dialog box 00 002 eee eee 274 Inserting a message 000 ce eee eee 274 Inserting a pause 0 000 eee 274 Renaming a Macro 1 ee 274 The Overwrite Config setting 275 Replacing a macro 20 02 ceeeeeeeeeee 275 Removing a Macro 2 ee 275 Default Macho niia sete eee elena ee eae 275 How to use the
60. fibre chromatic dispersion is derived from the measurement of the relative group delay using an approximation formula Phase Shif Ae l Reference a D paas O INA Tunable Filter Modulated Broadband source D Se Fig 9 CD ODM measurement using phase shift method Principle of optical power and attenuation measurements OFI Power A power meter is all that is needed to measure emitted or received measurement Power to measure emitted power connect the power meter directly to the output of the optical emitter to measure the power at the input of an optical receiver the power meter is connected to the end of the fiber at the point where the optical receiver would be connected User Manual 780000102 16 13 Chapter 1 Principles of measurement Principle of optical power and attenuation measurements OFI Attenuation For measurement of the attenuation of power in a complete link or in measurements elements such as sections of fiber connections or optical components a i light source and a power meter are required optical link loss This attenuation is usually deduced from the measurement of optical power at two points Laser light Power meter of source of the the Base Unit Base Unit Rererence Link under test iber Attenuation AaB P1 dBm P2 dBm To perform accurate measurements the following conditions are vital Use one of the light sources of the LTS or a light sou
61. file orin two different SOR files 100 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 6 Bi directional OTDR Test of a cable Traces may be stored manually or automatically on the master unit They can be stored manually on the slave unit If you had entered Auto Store then the results will be saved automati Cally If not click on FILE to access the OTDR File menu and select the right format Then press the Store Trace key Recalling OEO Recalling a OEO gt file traces If the OEO software option is available loading a OEO file with the Load key followed by View Trace key will open automatically the OEO OTDR tab in order to display the OEO trace Recalling two SOR gt files Wether the OEO software option is available or not if the two SOR files corresponding to a bi directional measurement are selected the key Load Bi dir appears The OEO trace is then displayed mee NOTE If both traces are not compatible not performed using the same wavelength and pulse width a error message is displayed lt Acquisi tion parameters for these two files are different gt For further information on File management see Chapter 15 File management on page 245 Test of a cable In order to test a full cable it is first necessary to make a OEO reference trace where all fiber events have been marked on both origin and end traces This trace may be obtained by requesting an auto measurement after which
62. half of the screen or the whole screen as a function of the lt Trace gt lt Table gt key see lt Trace gt lt Table gt key p 117 Contents of the table without statistics In the absence of statistics see Measurement parameters p 110 the parameters given for each channel are User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 7 Optical Spectrum Measurement Table of results the number of the channel the frequency or the channel wavelength according to the unit selected the spacing between the channels in THz or in nm the level of the channel in dBm For 507xxx series and 81xxx series this parameter indicates the peak channel power level For OSA xxx this parameter indicates the calculated total channel power level achieved by mathematical power integration over 12 min channel spacing around the channel center frequency see Min Channel spacing only available in OSA xxx on page 111 This power level may be different to the peak power level indicated by marker evaluation in the graphical trace mes NOTE The power integration method is used to avoid wrong channel power measurement with modulated signals having a larger bandwidth than the optical filter resolution bandwidth of the OSA 5 The noise level in dBm for all modules except OSA 320 Indicates the noise level measured left and right of the peak of the optical channel out of band noise measurement The noise level is normalized to the selected noise ac
63. measurement and Addition of markers in OEO page Automatic measurement and Addition of markers in OEO page Key lt Del Res when this key is activated in the EOE page and Del Res gt is selected Auto Meas OEO measurement is erased as well as OTDR measurement for both origin and end traces When Auto Meas is selected auto measurement is performed once more for both origin and end traces resulting in a new OEO measure ment Addition of in order to modify a marker on any of both origin and end traces select markers cursor A or B position your cursor when you want to modify or add a marker and press the key Set Event If there was no marker at this position a new one is added on both origin and end traces If there was two markers one on each of both origin and end traces both are deleted If there was only one marker either on the origin trace or on the end trace a second marker is added on the trace when none was present Markers display Markers gt are available on the trace taken from the origin Markers d are available on the trace taken from the end w NOTE Acquisitions must be done with the same resolution If not the addi tion of markers can not be performed perfectly File management Storing OEO Atthe end of a bi directional measurement the user has the possibility measurements t save the origin trace as well as the end trace for each wavelength either ina single OEO
64. of events is only available in Expert Mode User Manual 780000102 16 67 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Table of results Fig 29 Buttons used to modify types of events New more specific event types are then proposed Position the cursor on the line for which modification of event type is desired Click on the button corresponding to the required type of event Table notes with each event it is possible to associate anote of no more than 40 characters entered by the user an indicator of uncertainty qualifying the result displayed S NOTE This information appears in the table under the line relating to the event if it has been validated in the SETUP menu on the Notes line 68 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Table of results Notes For each wavelength a maximum of 16 notes is possible For each note 40 characters can be entered mee NOTE Each note is associated with an event Consequently if the event is deleted the note will be deleted too To enter a note inthe menu SETUP gt Result Screens gt Notes the Notes option must be selected onthe Results page in the table select the event press Advanced press Notes enter the text of the note in the edit menu that appears press Confirm and then Exit In the table of results the user can display indicators to evaluate the uncertainty of the result This fu
65. of results on page 146 Statistics results on page 149 File Management on page 151 PMD standards and limits on page 152 It is assumed that you are familiar with the operation of the Base Unit the OBS 55 Optical Broadband Source or BBS2A BroadBand Source and the OVP 15 Optical Variable Polarizer options 1 Equipped with PMD test kit option User Manual 780000102 16 135 Chapter 8 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement Recommended equipment Recommended equipment To perform a PMD measurement the following equipment is recom mended Base Unit with a module or plug in as mentioned above and associ ated optical connectors OVP 15 Optical Variable Polarizer 90 with associated optical connectors for 5073XXX plug ins and OSA XXX series modules OBS 55 Optical Broadband Source output power level 0 dBm with associated optical connectors or E81BBS2A optical Broadband Sources Visual Fault Locator VFL with associated optical connector Fiber scope with associated optical connectors Cleaning kit Two jumpers with associated optical connectors One coupler Communication tool either GSM or telephone or optical talk set NOTE A description and methods used to measure the Polarization Mode Dispersion PMD is described in PMD principle on page 7 NOTE The PMD value obtained by the fixe analyzer method is the mean PMD value also designated as
66. of this action will be to bring the power meter into use but not to activate the source Configuring the The measurement parameters can be accessed with the SETUP key measurement parameters of the power meter 208 User Manual 780000102 16 User Heep on modulation em Min Trweshold Max Threshold Fig 87 Wavelength User choice Beep on modulation Unit Reference level Aitenustor compensation 00 dit Chapter 12 OFI Module LTS function SNS rive 1300 na BNO nen 1420 eon 01 nm F150 nm GO pe 1400 seme 1570 New ESO ew NEES em Active dim s dlm Configuration of power measurement Selecting wavelength Auto the wavelength of the input signal will be automatically detected and selected to perform the measurement 850 980 1300 1310 1420 1450 1480 1490 1510 1550 or 1625 nm measurement performed at specified wavelength User choice of wavelength on the next line in the menu if the User option was selected in the Lambda line selection of the wavelength between 800 nm and 1650 nm in 1 nm steps by means of the direction keys 4 and gt Select wether a sound must be emitted or not when a modulation occured Yes No Unit of power displayed Watt dBm for displaying absolute power dB for displaying a result relative to a reference link loss If dB units were chosen in the previous line selection of the reference value for the wavelength selected Us
67. on START STOP 234 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 13 Multi Test Access Unit Use of the script specific client option Use of the script Specific client option A Connect the modules to the MTAU To use the Script function external keyboard and mouse are mandatory see Using an external keyboard mouse and screen touch options on page 35 Two specific scripts have been performed for specific clients Those scripts are always used with the MTAU module The aim is to make sequences of test one after the other according to the modules set into the 8000 Base Unit To perform a sequence of tests when you have a MTAU module you must also be equipped with the following other modules OTDR Module Event characterization OFI Module Bi directional IL ORL ODM Module Chromatic Dispersion PMD Attenuation profile BBS Module Broadband Source 1 Connect all test functions to the MTAU module as described 2 Connect the fiber under test to the common port Video Inspec ODM BBS2A tion Scope CD PMD AP et a oe 5 a l Ww 3 2 l I 3 MTAU 4 Multi Test Access unit ius allowing a single connection in D disconnection of the fiber under c test for multiple measurements I S eller gt B Jumper A A Fiber under test Keyboard l aes aa lt a USB port L SY Sa COM port Connect to fiber OTDR OF
68. on port A and your fiber after the EDFA on port B Click START STOP to perform both acquisitions Results appear automatically in the table A table is displayed see EDFA measurements p 128 showing for each channel S In Signal power before EDFA expressed in dBm N In Noise level before EDFA expressed in dBm S Out Signal power after EDFA expressed in dBm N Out Noise level after EDFA expressed in dBm Gain Power gain from EDFA expressed in dB NF Noise figure from EDFA expressed in dB lt ChannelP gt allows to move the cursor from one channel to another both in the trace and in the table of results User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 7 Optical Spectrum Measurement DFB results analysis Saving EDFA results Results are not saved in a file Nevertheless both traces may be stored as regular WDM traces To save your files Select Acq In to save the first file Click on FILE select name and Store Trace Click on RESULTS to come back to the previous screen Proceed the same way for Acq Out Loading EDFA results Results are not saved in a file Nevertheless both traces may be reloaded as regular WDM traces Results will be automatically recalcu lated Select Acq In before loading your first file Click on FILE and Explorer to select your file Load and view your trace The first trace is now loaded for lt Acq In gt Select Acq Out before loa
69. one has initiated the connection Nevertheless possible actions on Remote hard drives are seen with different names according to which these disks are all the same There are no master slave relations for data exchange i i e editing functions are similar to those of other explorers The directo Directory edit The editing f lar to those of oth The d function ies are at the top left of the screen If the cursor is in this part the func tions proposed by the keys are specific to the management of the directories 260 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 15 File management Explorer Function Selection of If the cursor is in the left hand part of the screen directories the direction keys can be used to select a directory the key opens the directory selected and closes it when pressed a second time in video inverse to show that it is the current working directory If it Do not confuse Selected with Active A directory may be displayed AN does not have a broken red line round it it is not active Active working directory Selected the cursor is here Broken red line around Ons l 69 Files _Sze Twe Ome j EE a Scope Alben TETT KD he COMO 17 2458 Fig 127 Selected Active File Edition of When a directory is selected the keys offer the following functions directories lt Create Directory gt Creation of a new directory An editor enables entry of its name lt
70. optical loss of the link tested It can be displayed in the table see Table of results page 212 FOX Function Configuration of the FOX automatic mea surement The FOX function is used to make automatical bidirectional optical power measurements and or ORL measurements at one or several wavelengths This function is also used to make a distance measurement of the link under test Two Base Unit are required each one equipped with an OFI module at each end of the fiber The OFI module 81xx is also compatible with the OFI 2000 With the FOX function the two Base Units can communicate and send messages to each other Two types of parameters can be modified in the FOX configuration of the OFI The Acquisition parameters The results screen parameters 214 1 Fiber Optic eXpert User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 12 OF Module FOX Function Feet Fruime Corning SAF OS Corning SEAS Coring Leal ie T Fig 90 FOX parameters Acquisition Laser All 1550 1310 1625 1550 1310 1550 parameters 1625 1310 1625 Measurements Loss Loss ORL Loss Length Loss ORL Length mus NOTE The acquisition and measurement parameters can change according to the OFI plug in used Results screen Index Of Refraction parameters Preset index 1550 SM Preset Index 1550 SM User from 1 30000 to 1 70000 Corning SMF 28 1 46810
71. or Graphics only To perform a splice measurement by the two points method display the Results page then 1 Place cursor A exactly on the fault then place cursor B after the splice that you wish to define 2 Press the Advanced key then Manual Measurement then select the function 2 Pt Loss 3 Press D User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Manual measurements The splice marker is placed at the point defined by the first left hand cursor and the result is displayed on the screen If the fault is reflective the reflectance value is also measured and displayed These results are added to the table of results If no result is displayed it is possible that the threshold of attenuation detection is higher than the attenuation that you are trying measure or else you may have selected No or Graphics only on the Results on Trace line me NOTE If you try to measure a splice on a slope the measurement is not car ried out and the following error message is displayed Slope found between two cursors Five points method To carry out a splice measurement by the five points method 1 Measure the slope preceding the fault to be measured then the slope following it Place the cursor on the fault between the two sections Press the Advanced key then Manual Measurement then select 5 Pt Loss 4 Press The splice event marker is placed on the cursor and the result is displayed on the trac
72. p a for an ORL measurement NOTE As ORL is an option establishing a reference for this measurement is not automatically available with the OFI module ORL Emitted 1 Link the FOX port to the power meter input port via a jumper power 2 Click on ORL Power Emitted 3 Click on the Go key The power measurement from the laser signal emitted is completed na i Fig 93 Establishing a reference for an ORL measurement User Manual 780000102 16 219 Chapter 12 OFI Module FOX Function Once the reference has been taken the reference screen is updated for the wavelengths available on the local instrument It indicates the type of reference used As the Zero mesurement as not yet been done the first line of the table displays the message Ref ORL Incomplete ORL Zero Once the Power Emitted measurement has been carried out the Zero adjustment adjustment can be performed 1 Disconnect the jumper from the external power meter and wrap this jumper still connected to the FOX port around the mandrel 6 to 7 times 2 Click on ORL Zero 3 Push the Go key Emoun Gaus Mrara J i Fig 94 Adjustement of the ORL Zero Once the reference has been taken the reference screen is updated for the wavelengths available on the local instrument It indicates the type of reference used and serial number of the local instrument are displayed on the first line of the table If not the message Ref ORL Incomplete is d
73. plug in with filter E8117RVLR Very Long Range 42 dB 1490 nm OTDR plug in E8118VLR49 Very Long Range 43 dB 1550 nm OTDR plug in E8115VLR Very Long Range 44 dB 1383 nm OTDR plug in E8118VLR38 Very Long Range 45 dB 1310 nm OTDR plug in E8114VLR Very Long Range 43 42 dB 1550 1625 nm OTDR plug in E8129VLR Very Long Range 45 43 dB 1310 1550 nm OTDR plug in E8126VLR Very Long Range 45 43 42 dB 1310 1550 1625 nm OTDR plug in E8136VLR Very Long Range 45 42 43 dB 1310 1490 1550 nm OTDR plug in E8138VLR49 Very Long Range 45 44 43 42 dB 1310 1383 1550 1625 nm OTDR plug in E8148VLR38 LR plug ins Reference Long Range 40 dB 1490 nm OTDR plug in E8118LR49 Long Range 41 dB 1625 nm OTDR plug in with filter E8117RLR Long Range 41 dB 1625 nm OTDR plug in E8117LR Long Range 41 dB 1550 nm OTDR plug in E8115LR Long Range 43 dB 1310 nm OTDR plug in E8114LR Long Range 41 41 dB 1550 1625 nm OTDR plug in E8129LR Long Range 43 41 dB 1310 1550 nm OTDR plug in E8126LR Long Range 43 40 41 dB 1310 1490 1550 nm OTDR plug in E8138LR49 Long Range 43 41 41 dB 1310 1550 1625 nm OTDR plug in E8136LR Source Option for OTDR singlemode plug in Reference Source Option for Singlemode plug ins E810TDRLS 1 Not available with UHD and SR e plug ins MR plug ins Reference Medium range 37dB 1625 nm OTDR plug in E8117MR Medium range 38 dB 1550 nm OTDR plug in E8115MR Medium range 40 dB 1310 nm OTDR plug in E8114MR Medium range 38 37dB 1550 1625 nm OTDR plug in E8129MR User Manual 78
74. relating to chromatic dispersion Standard Description Definition and test methods for linear deterministic attributes of singlemode fiber and cable TIA EIA FOTP Measurement Methods and Test Procedures 175 B Chromatic Dispersion ITU T G 650 1 Calculation charts available A typical calculation chart can be used to give the limit dispersion as a function of the speed of transmission per channel User Manual 780000102 16 185 Chapter 10 CD measurements using pulse delay method Source function Calculation chart is provided by the ITU standards Penalty gives the maximum cumulative chromatic dispersion for an attenuation of 1 dB as a function of the speed R given in Gbit s This calculation chart corre sponds approximately to the formula D lt 105 R2 Transmission speed Total permissible dispersion at 1550 nm SDH SONET for a given link not standardized to 1 km 2 5 Gbit s STM 16 OC 48 12000 to 16000 ps nm 10 Gbit s STM 64 OC 192 800 to 1000 ps nm 40 Gbit s STM 256 OC 768 60 to 100 ps nm 10G Ethernet Ethernet 738 ps nm Standards such as G dsn from ITU T aim to provide more accurate calcu lation charts These calculation charts are given for information only They depend on the spectral pass band of the optical signal transmitted the modulation and the sensitivity of the receiver If the limits of chromatic dispersion are attained then
75. sigma standard deviation value obtained for system cycling over 20 measurements 4 1530 1570nm band 5 Excluding reference fiber uncertainties Polarization Mode Dispersion Dynamic Range 58 dB 65 dB2 DGD Measurement range 0 08 to 130 ps DGD Type B uncertainty 4 0 02 ps 2 PMD DGD Repeatability 4 Measurement Time 0 025 ps 16 seconds independant of PMD value With averaging Up to 60ps in strong mode coupling Oe iN minimum value without averaging 296 User Manual With handheld Broadband Source OBS550 in High Dynamic mode Weak coupling for 0 1 ps to 60 ps DGD range up to 35 dB budget loss traceable to NPL standard 780000102 16 Chapter 18 Technical specifications ODM MR plug ins Attenuation Profile Dynamic Range 55 dB 60 dB Measurement Uncertainty 80 km fiber G652 0 006dB km 1310nm 0 003dB km 1550nm 0 004dB km 1625nm Measurement Time 6 seconds 1 With averaging 2 With handheld Broadband Source OBS550 in High Dynamic mode 3 Minimum value without averaging ODM MR plug ins Typical specifications of ODM MR plug ins Typical values measured at 25 C unless otherwise specified Chromatic Dispersion specifications 80km G652 10km G655 Wavelength Acquisition Range 1435 1640 nm Wavelength Display Range 1260 1640 nm Wavelength Uncertainty
76. site eee wares ete AE Gee 249 xvi User Manual 780000102 16 Table of Contents Fiber Description cesia Gees Oe e Ree ees 249 Fiber ID and Fiber Number 0 000 250 Colorcode ieee aa Moat conga Goes ya toc a E dev aaa 250 Fiber Nbr Increment 000 e eee eee 250 Link description 0 2 eee eee 251 Extremities are different 00000 251 Cable ld ss insdan mu pidge lege en sent eae oe 251 DireGtiON esiseina es de oe Ree i 252 Origins hades oo et oe Bee ae De Sle 252 End Location sisaria ena n a n e ee etd 252 Cable structure 0 00 00 cece ee 252 Operator 2 00 eens 254 COMMON 223 iced vise tse nbd on aai aaae E cect EAE ANa 254 Fil6 xpOrt eerie rie erase Kou el eit eel Ree 255 Buttons on the right of the screen 255 Explorer Function 000e eee e cece eee eee 256 Description of the explorer 0 0 02 eee eee 256 Storage Media sessi eee ee eee ee ee 257 Storage media built into the Base Unit 257 External USB storage media 0000 257 Standard Compact Flash card 8000 platform only 259 Remote Base Unit and data transfer 260 Abbreviations for storage media 05 260 Directory edit function 0 eee eee eee 260 Selection of directories 00 000s 261 Edition of directories 0 0000 e eee eee 261 File editing function 0 0 eee
77. standard deviation or delta between min and max selectable In the mode Statistics Mixed the table will show a mixture of statistical results current min and max of wavelength or frequency and current min and max of the power levels Channel sort The channels can be classified in the table in ascending order of frequency or wavelength level or SNR To modify this order Press the Table Contents key then Sort Press Freq Sort or Wavel Sort according to the units selected Level Sort or SNR Sort Successive addressing of channels according to the sort type selected On the trace and in the table it is possible to move the cursor from one channel to the next in the selected sort order To do this Use the key Cursor A gt lt Cursor B to choose the cursor A or B to be used on the trace Press the Channel key User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 7 Optical Spectrum Measurement Table of results Press 4 and gt to move the cursor to the following or preceding channel Table notes A note of not more than 40 characters entered by the user may be asso ciated with each channel NOTE Each note is associated with a channel Consequently if the channel is deleted the note the will be deleted too NOTE These notes appear in the table only if they have been validated in the SETUP menu on the Table notes line Result screen Similarly this option must be confirmed in order to be able to
78. successfully will then appear c Press Close d Then remove the USB memory stick using the appropriate procedure for your PC 9 Insert the memory stick into one of the sockets on the Base Unit provided for this purpose The icon x is displayed indicating the stick can be used safely User Manual 780000102 16 29 Chapter 2 Getting started Installing a new version of the software 30 NOTE A bip is emitted each time the USB memory stick is inserted or removed from the Base Unit 10 Press the SYSTEM button then successively the buttons Expert tools gt Software Upgrade gt Upgrade from USB The message Are you sure is displayed 11 Click on Confirm The list of the software versions available on the PC is displayed next to the versions installed on the Base Unit 12 Click on Show Previous choice or Show Next Choice to display the previous and next versions available 13 Click on Confirm this Choice to start the upgrade of the selected software s or Click on Confirm All Choices to upgrade all versions 14 Remove the USB stick as prompted 15 The 8000 shuts down 16 Reinsert the USB as required in the same USB port as previously repetitive bips advise you to insert the stick NOTE The software versions list does not always appear cf previous ver sions as well as the Show Previous Next Choice buttons and the Confirm Continue key In this case the upgrading starts automati Cally Upgrading begins
79. test The different parameters proposed are described below 1 The OBS 55 Optical Broadband Source covers S C L bands The 81BBS2A covers the OESCL bands 156 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 9 Attenuation profile AP Setup menu You may either choose the default values by pressing the Test Auto key either define your own configuration meee NOTE The key Copy Setup for all is displayed when the AP function is selected on the ODM module as well as one or several other func tions of this module II allows to apply the AP configuration to the other selected function s of the ODM module Test Auto configuration Setup Menu Acquisition Averaging acquisition No Results Screen Wavelength range full Normalized to km No File menu File naming Auto Auto store Yes Fiber Nb Increment Yes In standard mode you can set the parameters below Acquisition parameters Gees NOTE When the composite power of the input signal is higher than 20 dBm a warning is displayed and the signal is cut off Acquisition band OESCL Full band will be considered for acquisition SCL Only S C amp L bands will be considered for acquisition mee NOTE In cas e of SCL source the measurement will be performed exclu sively on SCL band User Manual 780000102 16 157 Chapter 9 Attenuation profile AP Setup menu Averaging acquisition Make Reference Measurements Results Screen
80. the acquisition parameters are not accessible check that the OTDR function has really been selected see Selecting the function on page 46 Mode Choose the mode of detection of events Expert the acquisition parameters are accessible by the user This mode can be configured either automati cally or manually by the user select Auto or Manual on the key Ea User Manual 780000102 16 47 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Configuring the reflectometry test 48 Quick Link Test the MTS T BERD 8000 starts an acquisition with an automatic configuration making the best compro mise for Pulse Range Resolution When acquisition is complete a measurement is made and the results are displayed Fault Locator the Fault locator mode allows to detect the end of fiber distance from the origin and by consequence to detect a possible break of this fibre see Fault Locator Mode on page 77 It also allows to display the total loss Laser The acquisition will be carried out on the wavelength selected for multiple wavelength modules the possible values depend on the modules All the acquisition will be carried out on all available wavelengths According to the module you are using the laser source mode is select able using the softkey LASER SOURCE at the bottom of the OTDR setup screen or selecting the icon Source on the System page for more details about this mode see Chapter 5 Source option of the OTDR Module
81. the function selected by the key will be controlled by the direction keys Bans User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface Using an external keyboard mouse and screen touch options Geo green confirmation key shows that the function selected will be controlled by the confirmation key Selection keys The selection may be exclusive only one choice possible or non exclu sive more than one option available at the same time ae This key offers two exclusive options The change of function occurs immediately the first time the key is pressed tdGraph This key offers two non exclusive options Pressing the key repeatedly modifies the choice Color of the keys When a selection key is associated with direction keys or the confirma tion key if the function is not selected the key is dark blue pressing the key once selects the function The key turns lighter in color to show the user that the direction keys are assigned to it Pressing more times will modify the choice made using the key Using an external keyboard mouse and screen touch options The external keyboard facilitates input of alphanumerical configuration parameters comments in the File menu notes in the table of results editing characters The mouse can be used instead of the direction keys to scroll through menus and make a selection Connect the keyboard and mouse to the USB connectors Virtua
82. the launch cable are eliminated from the table Attenuation and distances are then measured on the basis of the marker Evt 1 2 or 3 selected Distance Use the Edit Number key to enter a distance Min 0 Max 10 km 32 81 kfeet 6 22 miles or affect the active cursor value using the Set Cursor Distance Factory default value No Result screen Those parameters are valid for all the traces present on the screen Alarms gt Threshold None The alarm function is not active Fail This menu lists possible major alarm thresholds that the user could select If results are above those thresholds they will be highlighted in red in the table of results and the icon Ix will appear at the top right of the screen Warning This menu lists possible minor alarm thresholds that the user could select If results are between those thresh olds and the fail thresholds they will be highlighted in yellow in the table of results and the icon A will appear at the top right of the screen If all the results lie within the thresholds no result is in red or yellow the P icon will be a m NOTE According to the value set for Alarm gt Bend max the trace display will get a Bend selection with the Trace Table softkey allowing to display the splice differences in the table result Notes See Table notes on page 68 No no display of notes Notes display of notes entered by the user Uncertainty display of indicators of
83. the level of confidence in the measurement result Factory default value No Results on trace 54 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Acquisition No the trace alone All the trace with results and markers Graphics only the trace with markers only Factory default value All If All or Graphics only is selected the reflectometry trace is displayed with a dotted vertical line set on the end of launch cable if the Launch Cable is defined in the SETUP menu and a dotted vertical line on the end of fiber Grid Unit Colors RGB mes NOTE if Yes the grid is present on the result screen Factory default value No Units of the distances displayed km kfeet miles metre feet When overlaying several traces see Overlay trace function on page 40 you can change each trace color Active curve allows to change the active curve color Curve 1 to 8 allows to change the selected curve color from trace 1 to 8 To get the default color for each trace select the trace number and click on Colors Default When you change the trace color the new color is displayed at the right side of its value Acquisition There are 4 ways to start an OTDR acquisition with the MTS T BERD 8000 areal time mode in which the MTS T BERD 8000 makes acauisi tions up to ten times per second and displays the resulting trace together with an indicat
84. the upgrade is completed you may remove the virtual drive in our example N by using the command subst N d Installation from 1 Connect the Base Unit into mains with the AC plug and switch it on the ss 2 Connect the Base Unit to the PC by an Ethernet link ora mu NOTE Use a cross over if the Base Unit is directly connected to the PC ora direct cable if the Base Unit is connected to the LAN 3 Insert the CD ROM in the drive of the PC 4 Onthe PC use Windows Explorer to open the CD ROM Run TFTPD32 exe note the Server Interfaces address which appears in the TFTPD32 window Note TFTPD32 exe is one of the extracted files 24 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 2 Getting started Installing a new version of the software 5 Run FTPServer exe An error message will appear click on OK Note FTPServer exe is one of the extracted files The window Pablo s FTP server is displayed Click on the green arrow or select menu File gt Start 6 On the Base Unit press the SYSTEM key then System Setup in Utility gt Upgrade Parameters gt Server adress enter the IP address previously noted see above 7 Quit the SYSTEM menu and then press in succession Expert Tools gt Software Upgrade gt Upgrade via Ethernet The message Verify IP address of PC server appears 8 Click on Continue The list of the software versions available on the PC is displayed next to the versions installed on the Base Unit 9 C
85. typical calculation chart can be used to give the limit dispersion as a function of the speed of transmission per channel Calculation chart is provided by the ITU standards Penalty gives the maximum cumulative chromatic dispersion for an attenuation of 1 dB as a function of the speed R given in Gbit s This calculation chart corre sponds approximately to the formula D lt 105 R2 Transmission speed Total permissible dispersion at 1550 nm SDH SONET for a given link not standardized to 1 km 2 5 Gbit s STM 16 OC 48 12000 to 16000 ps nm 10 Gbit s STM 64 OC 192 800 to 1000 ps nm User Manual 780000102 16 203 Chapter 11 CD measurements using phase shift method CD standards and limits 204 Transmission speed Total permissible dispersion at 1550 nm Son SONET for a given link not standardized to 1 km 40 Gbit s STM 256 OC 768 60 to 100 ps nm 10G Ethernet Ethernet 738 ps nm Standards such as G dsn from ITU T aim to provide more accurate calcu lation charts These calculation charts are given for information only They depend on the spectral pass band of the optical signal transmitted the modulation and the sensitivity of the receiver If the limits of chromatic dispersion are attained then appropriate compensators can be incorporated along the link to neutralize its effect These compensators introduce negative delay values to bring the
86. value is displayed in brackets on the trace for example R 50 dB Factory default value No NOTE Ghosts are detected only during an automatic measurement Fiber end Auto recommended option in which the MTS T BERD 8000 automatically detects the end of a fiber 3 to 20 dB in steps of 1 dB threshold of detection of end of fiber Factory default value Auto Event After Fiber End Expert mode only If yes the events after the end of the link are detected Factory default value No Total Loss Expert mode only Before evt on the table for a given line the total loss result does not include the splice connector loss of the corresponding line After evt on the table for a given line the total loss measure ment on the table does include the splice connector loss of the corresponding line With any dual or triple wavelength measurement module the user will have access to the macro bend detection function in the test setup Each event of the selected wavelengths will then be compared User Manual 780000102 16 51 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Configuring the reflectometry test Bend Select the bend value in dB using the direction keys and or the numeric keypad Factory default value Auto Index of refraction Choice of group refraction index of the whole fiber User Either define for each wavelength 1310 SM 1360 1510 SM 1550 SM 1625 SM a refraction i
87. you if you really wish to overwrite the macro Click Yes if you wish to continue Select an existing macro and click on the soft key Remove A message will be displayed asking you if you really wish to delete the selected macro Click Yes if you wish to continue Default macro How to use the default macro How to seta macro as default It is possible to set one macro as default This is very useful if for example you wish to perform one macro several times in a row Double clicking on the button SCRIPT will automatically play the default macro Select Default Macro and choose in the sub menu which macro you wish to set as default As an alternative you may also select a macro and press the soft key Set as default User Manual 780000102 16 275 Chapter 16 Macros Macro playback Piy 123 redit 3 Empty Empty Empty 2 3 4 Empty Macro 2 is set as default 7 8 9 0 Alternatively set any other ee as default using this button Empty Empty Empty Empty Fig 133 Default button Macro playback To play the default macro you may directly double click on SCRIPT To play another macro go to the macro screen Click on SCRIPT once and select the macro you wish to play Then press the soft key Play During all the play back of the macro you can see the icon M gt atthe top of the screen me NOTE This icon changes to Mii when the playback
88. 00 Base Unit is on mains and is switched off before the USB memory stick is properly disconnected the Base Unit needs to be completely switched off using the ON OFF button and main plug unplugged Standard Compact The Base Unit is equipped as standard with a slot in which a Compact Flash card 8000 Flash card can be inserted platform only The Compact Flash card must be inserted before switching on the instrument It is strongly recommended that this medium should not be withdrawn or reinserted while the instrument is switched on User Manual 780000102 16 259 Chapter 15 File management Explorer Function Remote Base Unit During a data transfer with the option Data Talkset the distant Base and data transfer Unit hard drive connected by the fiber is displayed as a storage media File and directory edition features may all be used in the same manner with this storage media as with the other ones Abbreviations for The abbreviations used in the explorer for the different storage media storage media are Abbreviation Storage medium harddisk Hard disk disk Internal flash memory if no hard disk floppy Floppy disk cdrom CD ROM usbflash USB memory stick cflash Compact Flash memory card masterdisk Hard drive from the remote Base Unit which initiated the connection slavedisk Hard drive from the remote Base Unit which accepted the connection 1 Only with MTS T BERD 8000
89. 0000102 16 305 Chapter 19 Options and accessories References of measurement plug ins VSRE plug ins Low range 26 dB 1550 nm OTDR plug in MR plug ins Reference Medium range 40 38 dB 1310 1550 nm OTDR plug in E8126MR Medium range 40 38 37dB 1310 1550 1625 nm OTDR plug in E8136MR Medium range 40 40 39 dB 1310 1490 1550 nm OTDR plug in E8138MR49 Reference E8115VSRE Low range 28 26 dB 1310 1550 nm OTDR plug in E8126VSRE SRL Singlemode Multimode plug ins Short Range LAN 25 23 40 38 dB 850 1300 1310 1550 nm OTDR plug in E8146SRL Reference Short Range LAN 25 23 40 38 37 dB 850 1300 1310 1550 1625 nm OTDR E8156SRL plug in References of CWDM plug ins CWDM plug ins WDM PMD Modules PMD plug ins PMD Plug in Band S C L Reference 1891 1611nm with in service testing capabity ES140OTDRCWDM1 15111531nm with in service testing capability E8140OTDRCWDM2 13111331nm with in service testing capability E3140OTDRCWDMS Source Option for CWDM OTDR Reference Source Option for CWDM OTDR plug ins E810TDRLS Reference E81PMD PMD AP WDM plug in Band O E S C L E81WDMPMD WDM plug ins WDM plug in Band S C L 306 User Manual 780000102 16 Reference E81WDM Chapter 19 Options and accessories References of measurement plug ins PMD accessories Reference Optical variable polarizer not necessary for 81XXX plug ins EOVP 15 Broadban
90. 02 16 9 Chapter 1 Principles of measurement Principle of measurement of Chromatic Dispersion CD OTDR using pulse delay method A given speed of transmission is thus associated with a limit wavelength And for a fiber with offset dispersion standard G 653 ITU T unequal spacing of the channels around 1550 nm is imposed in order to avoid fiber non linearities such as the mixing of four waves Chromatic dispersion is defined by three principal parameters delay at a given wavelength in ps the coefficient of dispersion D expressed in ps nm This corre sponds to the drift in delay as a function of wavelength or to the slope of the curve representing delay as a function of distance at a given wavelength It is expressed in ps nm km if it is standardized to one km its value is divided by the length of the fiber expressed in km the slope S expressed in ps nm2 km This corresponds to the drift in the coefficient of dispersion as a function of wavelength or to the slope of the curve representing dispersion as a function of distance at a given wavelength The coefficient of dispersion standardized to one km and the slope take into account the length of the fiber which may be different from the length of the cable due to the helicoidal factor It is therefore important to know this length with accuracy failing which the results of the measurement will be degraded an error of 10 in the length of the fiber will induce
91. 07Ext extension card or with a81WDM 81WDMPMD module or with the OSA XXX series f The OSA XXX are only available on MTS T BERD 8000 platforms The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows Configuration of the instrument on page 106 WDM OSA test configuration on page 106 Acquisition on page 116 Trace display functions on page 117 Table of results on page 120 Channel filtering on page 124 Drift measurement on page 125 EDFA results analysis on page 1271 DFB results analysis on page 129 Testing ROADM networks on page 131 File Management on page 133 1 Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier User Manual 780000102 16 105 Chapter 7 Optical Spect rum Measurement Configuration of the instrument Configuration o f the instrument After connecting the fiber to be tested to the optical connector you must select the OSA module see the Base Unit manual WDM OSA test configuration To configure the Base Unit in preparation for an OSA test on a fiber press the SETUP button The various measurement parameters are proposed 1 NOTE With OSA 320 two auto modes are available Test Auto WDM mode and Test Auto I OSNR mode Configuration of acquisition in Test Auto mode Test Auto I OSNR Parameter Test Auto WDM only OSA 320 Acquisition settings Sweep single Averaging acquisi
92. 0F11 1310 1490 1550nm OFI plug in module high power E81320F12 OFI Module option Reference ORL option for OFI plug in module with mandrel E810FIORL BBS Modules BBS plug ins BroadBand Source plug in 1260 1640nm E81BBS2A Application Softwares Application software Reference Optical Fiber Trace Software for post analysis EOFS100 Optical Fiber Cable Software Cable for Acceptance report generation EOFS200 Printer Internal Printer modules 8100 series Internal Printer Module E82PRINTER 308 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 19 Options and accessories User manual references Launch Fiber Modules Launch fiber modules for OTDR demo and test Launch cable singlemode 1 fiber G652 2km E82LFSM2 Launch cable singlemode 1 fiber G652 4 km E82LFSM4 1 Two optical connectors must be specified when ordering each launch fiber module User manual references User manuals for MTS T BERD plug ins User manual for modules 8100 series French E8100M01 User manual for modules 8100 series English E8100M02 User manual for modules 8100 series German E8100M03 References of optical connectors and adapters Optical connectors for plug ins Reisr ne OTDR Single mode and WDM Fixed Connector FC PC Connector EFCPC FC APC Connector only for single mode EFCAPC E2000 Connector only for single mode EE2000 E2000 HRL Connector only for single mode EE2000HRL 1 A Connect
93. 10 ps lt 0 5 40 Gbit s STM 256 OC 768 25 12 ps 2 5 ps lt 0 125 10G Ethernet Ethernet 5 ps 0 25 Abacus for a You will find below the abacus for a typical system giving the maximum typical system distance as a function of PMD coefficient for given transmission bit rates 152 This abacus is provided with the following assumptions the PMD is considered to be Maxwelliam User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 8 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement PMD standards and limits NRZ coding is used 1550 nm lasers are used a maximum power penalty of 1 dB is acceptable a BER is typically between 10 and 107 2 With this in mind the following formula could be applied L is the distance in km B the bit rate in Gbit s PMD the PMD value in ps km L km 104 x 1 B x PMD 2 5 Gbit s STM16 OC 48 10 Gbit s STM64 0C 192 40 Gbit s STM128 0C 74 Fig 59 Abacus for a typical system maximum distance as a function of PMD coefficient for standard bit rates User Manual 780000102 16 153 Chapter 8 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement PMD standards and limits 154 User Manual 780000102 16 Attenuation profile This chapter describes the different steps in carrying out a Attenuation Profile AP measurement with a Base Unit equipped with a 81WDMPMD full band plug in or an ODM Module The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows Recommended equipment on p
94. 102 16 at 20 us pulse width with Non Zero Dispersion Fibers in single wavelength configuration EDZ measured at 1 5 dB below the peak of a non saturated reflecting event at shortest pulsewidth ADZ measured at 0 5 dB on the basis of a linear regression from a reflectance of type FC UPC 55 dB at 287 Chapter 18 Technical specifications Reflectometer plug ins Multi Single mode SRL module Multimode Singlemode SRL Plug in Central Wavelength 850 1300 nm 20 nm 1310 1550 1625 nm 20 nm 2 Min IEC Dynamic 20 18 dB 36 33 5 33 5 dB Typical RMS Dynamic Range 24 24 dB 40 38 37 dB Distance Range Up to 80 km Up to 380 km Pulse width 3 ns to 300 ns 3 ns to 20 us Event Dead Zone 0 5m 0 8m Attenuation Dead Zone 2m 4m Continuous Wave Output Power 3 5 dBm e 65 dm Laser at 50 ns and 25 C 2 Laser at 10 us and 25 C 3 Guaranteed value corresponding to the one way difference in dB between the level of back diffusion extrapolated at the beginning of the fiber and the level containing 98 of noise after 3 minutes of aver aging with the largest pulsewidth according to IEC 61749 standard 4 Typical value corresponding to the difference in dB between the level of back diffusion extrapolated at the beginning of the fiber and the RMS noise level after 3 minutes of averaging with the largest pulsewidth 5 EDZ measured at 1 5 dB below the peak of a
95. 1255 to 1650 nm Absolute accuracy of wavelength 0 1 nm Repeatability of dispersion coefficient 0 2 ps nm km Dispersion range 0 1 ps at 100 ps nm km Repeatability of dispersion slope 1 1 with automatic measurement and termination connector 3 point measure ment 2 on anon saturated Fresnel 3 at 1550 nm on a G652 fiber 75 km long Source specifications Wavelength DFB lasers 1310 5nm 5083 CD OTDR plug in 1480 5nm 1550 5nm 1625 5nm Output power Variable Spectrum width lt 10pm Power stability over 24 h 0 10 dB Output power calibrated 1 5 dBm 3 dBm 3 dBm 3 dBm 10 dB with respect to calibrated power 1 after 15 minutes pre heating 294 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 18 Technical specifications CD OTDR plug ins Laser class of source of CD OTDR plug in At 1310 1480 1550 1625 nm laser class 1 OTDR Specifications 5083 CD OTDR plug in Wavelength DFB lasers 1310 5nm 1480 5 nm 1550 5nm 1625 5nm IEC dynamic guaranteed 35 dB 33 dB 32 5 dB 33 dB Dynamic RMS typical 39 dB 38 dB 37 dB 37 dB Distance 380 km Pulse width 10 ns to 20 us Dead Zone Event EDZ 6 m Attenuation ADZ 30 m 1 Guaranteed value corresponding to the one way difference in dB between the level of back diffusion extrapolated at the beginning of the fiber and the level containing 98 of noise after
96. 128 DFB results analysis 00 00 e ee eee eee 129 DFB test configuration 0 0 cee eee eee 129 DFB measurements 00 00 e eee eee eee 130 DFB results orrara reie n fat pen ee ee ee 130 Testing ROADM networks 0020 cece eens 131 File Management 0 eee e ee eee eee eee 133 Storing OSA measurements 0000s ee eee 133 Recalling OSA files 2 0 0 0 eee eee 133 Chapter 8 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement 135 Recommended equipment 2200eeeeee 136 PMD test setup Menu 00 0c eee eee eee eee 136 Test Auto Configuration 0 00 0 cc eee eee 137 Manual Mode Configuration 0000 137 Acquisition parameters 0 00 0 138 Measurement parameters 0 0 cee eee eee 139 Results Screen parameters 0000 e eee eee 140 Performing a PMD measurement with a 5073XXX plug in or OSA XXX series module 00 eee eee eee 141 Performing the reference 00 00005 141 Remote operator 0 000 000 eee 141 Local operator 00 000 cee eee 142 Performing the measurement 000000 144 Performing a PMD measurement with a 81XXX plug in or an ODM plugein sincere sce ae ered ae ee ere eee 145 Remote operator 0 eee ee ee ee Pee eee eb eee 145 Localioperator sue b sees eedep ales mede paoe din foe bo 145 Display of results 2 00 e eee eee eee 146 Spectrum FFT me
97. 158 Only considered for measurement not for reference it is used to improve the dynamic range of the unit No No average of the acquisition sample to be performed Low Low averaging 4 samples Medium Medium averaging 16 samples High High averaging 32 samples NOTE An increase of the averaging can improve the dynamic range to up to 5 dB Yes Option to select if you wish to perform a reference before performing the AP measurement No Default option The instrument automatically sets back to this option after the reference has been performed The date of the last reference is displayed below this field Known Length No If you do not know the fiber length select No Yes If you know the fiber length select Yes Fiber length If Yes has been selected on the previous line click on Edit number to use the numeric keypad or use the direction keys to modify the fiber length Min 0 100 km Max 300 km If the fiber length is not known then the results table will not display the Spectral attenuation values in Profile mode see Figure 64 on page 163 Unit Select the distance unit km kfeet miles Wavelength Range Full Displays results along the full band C L Band Displays results along S C L bands C LBand Displays results along C L bands User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 9 Attenuation profile AP Measurement Manual Displays results between 2 user defi
98. 2 16 43 Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface Saving when the instrument is shut down 44 User Manual 780000102 16 Reflectometry measurements Pressing the START STOP key is all that is needed to start or stop a measurement However it is necessary to configure the measurement and the type of results desired This chapter describes the different stages in a reflectometry measure ment made using an OTDR plug in and the OTDR function of a 5083CD plug in The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows Selecting the function on page 46 Configuring the reflectometry test on page 46 Acquisition on page 55 Trace display functions on page 62 Events on page 63 Table of results on page 64 Automatic measurement and detection on page 70 Addition of markers on page 71 Manual measurements on page 72 Memorization of the position of events on page 76 Fault Locator Mode on page 77 Reference Trace function on page 80 File Management on page 82 User Manual 780000102 16 45 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Selecting the function Selecting the function Press the SYSTEM button If the instrument is equipped with several plug ins or if the sole module performs several functions use the direction keys and gt to select the function the icon under the mouse pointer is surrounded with a gr
99. 3 Graphical User Interface Overlay trace function On the Zoom Shift key select Shift Use the direction keys to shift the trace in the desired direction me NOTE For a Chromatic Dispersion curve click on Config in order to display the zoom and shift functions Zoom Auto OTDR The Zoom Auto key alows to go to an optimized display of the trace Full scale OSA To display the entire trace with no zoom or displacement PMD AP _ either press the Full Scale key or with Trace selected on the Trace Event key press the amp button Overlay trace function This very useful function enables up to eight traces to be displayed on the screen at once either to compare traces acquired on a number of different fibers in the same cable orto observe changes over time in traces taken of one and the same fiber orto compare both curves get for each way of propagation in the o Back mode For this purpose the Base Unit possesses an overlay memory which can store the current trace for comparison with further traces to be acquired subsequently orreference traces previously saved on floppy disk or CD ROM or in the internal memory for comparison with the current trace or traces of different wavelengths for comparative purposes OTDR 40 User Manual 780000102 16 Overlaying several traces stored in memory Display of traces in overlay Adding traces in overlay Chapter 3
100. 4 CD standards and limits on page 185 Source function on page 186 User Manual 780000102 16 167 Chapter 10 CD measurements using pulse delay method Configuring the instrument Configuring the instrument After connecting the fiber under test to the optical connector of the 5083CD module of the Base Unit you must select the CD function To do this press the SYSTEM button If the instrument is equipped with more than one plug in or if the sole plug in provides more than one function use the direction keys and gt to select the function the icon under the cursor is framed in green select the function by pressing amp the icon turns orange yellow Configuring the CD test To configure a chromatic dispersion measurement on a fiber press the SETUP button The different measurement parameters will be displayed You have two choices press the Test Auto to obtain the default config uration or define your own configuration Parameters chosen by automatic configuration Laser Mode Analysis window Time of measurement Reference wavelength Index Measurement zone Approximation formula Type of fiber 1st analysis window Lower wavelength Upper wavelength Inc wavelength Standardized to 1km Unit All Auto Auto automatically positionned on the end of fiber 00 25 1550 nm 1 465 link Sellmeier 5T Standard Dispersion 1255 0 nm 1650 0 nm 5nm Yes km
101. 4 Reflectometry measurements Table of results The MTS T BERD 8000 displays a value if E g Value of the thresholds the attenuation or the reflectance has one of the following values Attenuat dB Reflect dB Attenuation Reflectance 0 05 60 gt 0 05 dB gt 60 dB 2 1 15 gt 1dB gt 15 dB 3 6 gt 6dB 1 Example a value will be displayed at 43 dB 2 Example a value will be displayed at 14 dB but not at 20 dB The reflectance of an event is always measured except when the event causes a saturated Fresnel peak or if it is drowned out by noise In this case the MTS T BERD 8000 displays gt to show that the actual reflec tance exceeds the value displayed For example to detect all the splices on a fiber having attenuation greater than 0 05 dB select the different thresholds of the events to be detected in the menu called by the SETUP key in the Measurements gt Detection window Relative measurements using the 2 point method can be carried out by means of the Event function in coordination with the two cursors For example you can analyze the total loss on a link with launch cable Place one of the cursors at the end of the launch cable Select the other cursor Use the Event function The measurements displayed give the actual distance from the start of the link and the attenuation of the link plus the attenuation of the connection Table of results mes NOTE I
102. 45 File naming Fiber Cable Cable_lId Fiber_ Num _ Lambdal direction Increment Fiber number Yes Auto Store yes Factory default settings The Factory Defaults key imposes the parameters for acquisition measurement and display of results defined as default settings in factory Measurement You can select the following measurement parameters in the Measure parameters ments field Those parameters are valid for all traces present on the screen Detection Choice of events to be detected Splice Expert mode only All all splices will be detected None no splice will be detected or choose the threshold from which splices will be detected between 0 01 dB and 1 99 dB in steps of 0 01 dB Factory default value Auto User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Configuring the reflectometry test Reflectance Expert mode only All all reflections will be detected None no reflection will be detected or choose the threshold from which reflections will be detected between 98 and 11 in steps of 1 dB Factory default value All NOTE If no result is displayed after a measurement make sure that the parameter All is selected for the detection of splices and reflections Ghost Expert mode only Choice Yes No No Analysis of whether information relating to ghosts is to be displayed If ghosts are displayed the reflection icon in the table of results appears dotted and the reflection
103. 5 File management User Manual 780000102 16 151 Chapter 8 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement PMD standards and limits PMD standards and limits Table 1 List of the appropriate standards and limits for PMD Standards Description Limits ITU T G 650 Definition and test methods for the rele PMD method is provided vant parameters of single mode fibers Characteristics of a single mode optical PMD Coefficient lt 0 5 ps ITU T Q652 fiber cable square km at 1550 nm ITU T G 653 Characteristics of a dispersion shifted sin PMD Coefficient lt 0 5 ps gle mode optical fiber cable square km at 1550 nm ITU T G 655 Characteristics of a non zero dispersion PMD Coefficient lt 0 5 ps shifted single mode optical fiber cable square km at 1550 nm ITU T G69 Optical interfaces for single channel STM No specified limit 64 STM 256 systems and other SDH Refer to cable fiber prop chapter 6 3 2 3 i systems with optical amplifiers erties Limit of the second order coefficient PMD2 lt 0 2 ps nm km Some organizations and standards are stating that 10 of the bit rate for the PMD delay can be tolerated for a system without disturbing the network performance by more than 1 dB loss at 1550 nm with NRZ coding Bit Rate Equivalent PMD Delay PMD Coefficient Per Channel poh penen Time slot Limit For 400 km 2 5 Gbit s STM 16 OC 48 401 ps 40 ps lt 2 10 Gbit s STM 64 OC 192 100 ps
104. 5m Zone Attenuation dead 5 5m 2m zone 1 Laser at 50 ns and 25 C 2 Guaranteed value corresponding to the one way difference in dB between the level of back diffusion extrapolated at the beginning of the fiber and the level containing 98 of noise after 3 minutes of averaging with the largest pulsewidth according to IEC 61749 standard 3 Typical value corresponding to the difference in dB between the level of back diffusion extrapolated at the beginning of the fiber and the RMS noise level after 3 minutes of aver aging with the largest pulsewidth 4 Measured at 1 5 dB below the peak of a non saturated reflecting event with the shortest pulsewidth 5 Measured at 0 5 dB on the basis of a linear regression from a reflectance of type FC UPC with the shortest pulsewidth 286 User Manual 780000102 16 Single mode modules Chapter 18 Technical specifications Reflectometer plug ins Plug ins Monomode Ultra High j Dynamic Very Long Medium Very Short Plug ins Short distance Long Range Long Range Range Range distance 8114 15 26 8115 26 36 29 SR SRe UHD 81xx VLR 81xx LR 81xx MR 81xxVSRE 1310 20 nm 4310 20nm 1383 2nm 1310 20nm 1310 20 nm Central Wavelength 1310 20 nm 4550420nm 1490 15 nm 1490 15nm 1490 15 nm 1310 20 nm 1550 20 nm T m 1550 20nm 1550 20 nm 1550 20 nm 1625 10nm 1550 20 nm 1625 10 1625 10 1625 15 nm BS SASA min 40dB F P
105. 6 199 Chapter 11 CD measurements using phase shift method Display of CD results The appeareance of the delay curve may be different according to the parameters defined in the CD Setup Menu In the figure 78 the following parameters have been configured Alarms Active within the threshold defined Normalized to km Yes Show Measured Points Yes Show Fit Formula Yes meee NOTE If the parameter Normalized to km is set to No the result table will not display the Dispersion Coef ps nm km values Functions Delay Dispersion Slope key available Once the delay curve is displayed you can move to the Dispersion then the Slope Curve using the Delay Dispersion Slope key i iinn i EDO Fig 83 Example of the Slope display Trace Table key This key enables to display either the trace and table when the two boxes are marked or the table only 200 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 11 CD measurements using phase shift method Display of CD results Fig 84 Example of Table display The results table shows for each wavelength calculated using the wave length range and the approximation formula configured in the CD setup menu the delay the dispersion the Dispersion Coefficient if Normalized to km is set to Yes in the Setup menu If not this column is empty the Slope The blue line at the top of the table displays the following information The Bit Rate Info
106. 94 Performing a Reference measurement 194 Saving a reference measurement 196 Loading existing reference 045 197 Performing a Chromatic Dispersion Measurement 197 Performing a CD measurement through amplifiers 198 User Manual 780000102 16 xiv Table of Contents Display of CD results 00 2 e eee eee eee 199 Functions available 0 0 00 ce eee eee 200 File Management 0c e eee eee eee 202 Storing CD measurements 00 00005 202 Recalling reference or CD measurement files 202 CD standards and limits 02 eee eee 203 Chapter 12 OFI Module 205 OFI module wc 2 t cht Soa eeie tone coe ee ee 206 Selection of the OFI module 000005 206 ETS FUNCOM ioe cies Stee e chides Bele eee bie eee 206 Principle of the optical power and attenuation measurements 206 Power measurement 0000 e eee eee 206 Attenuation measurements optical link loss 207 Connections to the power meter and the source 208 Configuring the LTS 0 0 0 0 eee eee 208 Configuring the measurement parameters of the power meter 208 Configuring the alarm parameters of the power meter 210 Configuring and displaying the parameters of the source 210 Display of results and command 211 Result of the measurement in progress 211 Table of results 0 0 00 cece
107. Cursors A and B are automatically positioned on the first DFB laser respectively on the max SMSR and the pick of the main component DFB results A table is displayed see DFB measurements p 130 showing for each DFB 130 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 7 Optical Spectrum Measurement Testing ROADM networks Channel Number of DFB laser detected Wavelen Wavelength expressed in nm of the DFB main component Level Peak amplitude expressed in dBm SMSR Side Mode Suppression Ratio expressed in dBc Mode off Mode Offset expressed in nm BW level Calculated bandwidth expressed in nm according to the bandwidth level expressed in dBc defined in the setup menu When the lt Channel gt key is selected use the arrow keys and gt to move the cursor from one DFB pick to another both in the trace and in the table of results Saving DFB results DFB Results are not saved in a file Nevertheless the trace may be stored as a regular WDM trace To save your files Click on FILE select name and Store Trace Click on RESULTS to come back to the previous screen Loading DFB results Results are not saved in a file Nevertheless the trace may be reloaded as a regular WDM trace Make sure Type gt is set on DFB in the setup menu to recalculate DFB results Results appear automatically in the table Testing ROADM networks In ROADM networks each channel may traverse different rout
108. EM key then System Setup in Utility gt Upgrade Parameters gt Server address enter the IP address previously noted see 9 above Quit the System menu and then press in succession Expert Tools gt Software Upgrade gt Upgrade via Ethernet The message Verify IP address of PC server appears Click on Continue The list of the software versions available on the PC is displayed next to the versions installed on the Base Unit User Manual 780000102 16 23 Chapter 2 Getting started Installing a new version of the software t More recent version on the PC than on the Base Unit 4 Less recent version on the PC than on the Base Unit Identical version on the PC and on the Base Unit 13 Click on Show Prev choice or Show Next Choice to display the previous and next versions available 14 Click on Confirm this Choice to start the upgrade of the selected software s or Click on Confirm All Choices to upgrade all versions mes NOTE The software versions list does not always appear cf previous ver sions as well as the Show Previous Next Choice buttons and the Confirm Continue key In this case the upgrading starts automati Cally Upgrading begins The Base Unit is automatically rebooted Upgrading takes several minutes At the end the Base Unit is auto matically restarted if the boot version is superior to version 01 16 15 On the PC close the two windows opened to perform the installa tion 16 Once
109. FSM4 plug two jumpers to be used as a launch or receive cable with an OTDR ins These plug ins can also be used for demonstration and training purpose mee NOTE As these plug ins are not test instruments they are not supplied with a certificate of calibration 82LFSM2 82LFSM4 Type of fiber used Corning SMF 28 or SMF 28e Recommended group indices 1 4677 1310nm and 1 4682 1550 1625nm Length of fiber 2 km 0 02 0 11 km 4 km 0 03 0 21 km Attenuation of connectors lt 0 5 dB 1 Connectors cleaned in good conditions User Manual 780000102 16 299 Chapter 18 Technical specifications MTAU plug ins MTAU plug ins All specifications are given at 25 C excluding connectors Plug in 81MTAU2 81MTAU4 Wavelength range nm 1260 1640 nm Insertion Loss max dB 1 dB 1 5 dB Return Loss max dB 50 dB PDL max dB 0 1 dB Repeatability max dB 0 01 dB 1 Polarization Dependent Loss 2 At constant temperature and polarization BBS plug ins Specifications measured at 25 C unless otherwise mentioned Broadband Source New Generation Parameter 81BBS2A Wavelength range 1260 1640 nm Minimum spectral density dBm 0 1 nm 40 1 Typical Output power dBm 12 52 Power consumption Wh 10 Operating temperature range C 5 to 40 C 1 over 1260 1630 nm wavelength range AP mode 2 AP Mode 300 User Manual 780000102 16
110. Fig 135 Loading paper in the printer User Manual 780000102 16 281 Chapter 17 Printer Setting up the printer Setting up the printer The printer must be correctly configured in the setup menu Printer must be set to Internal or Internal compressed The Printer icon must be activated in the SYSTEM screen such as shown in figure Printer activated page 282 For both these requirements you may refer to the Base Unit manual Fig 136 Printer activated Printing a page Before printing a page make sure you remove the cover and push it back until it holds open Press PRINT The page currently displayed will be printing You can see the icon at the top of the screen until the page is finished to be printed Paper used with internal printer is thermo sensitive and photo sensi A N tive Keep your printed documents away from heat and light 282 User Manual 780000102 16 Technical specifications This chapter shows the technical specifications of the plug ins of the Base Unit and options and accessories available The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows Reflectometer plug ins on page 284 WDM plug ins on page 292 PMD plug ins on page 293 CD OTDR plug ins on page 294 ODM plug ins on page 296 ODM MR plug ins on page 297 Information on fiber plug ins 5020TF and 82LFSM2 82LFSM4 on page 298 MTAU plug ins on p
111. File management Explorer Function A 258 USB memory stick connection Insert the USB memory stick in one 8000 6000 Base Unit s USB port A beep is emitted to confirm the successful insertion and recognition of a USB memory stick Then the icon r is displayed in the upper banner to inform the user the USB stick is ready to be used Do not connect a USB memory stick while a USB printer is printing If the 8000 6000 Base Unit does not emit a beep disconnect and recon nect the USB memory stick do not perform this action too quickly wait 5 seconds between the disconnection and reconnection If after several trials no beep is emitted two problems can be consid ered A previous USB memory stick has not been properly disconnected Go to USB memory stick disconnection on page 259 the USB memory stick is not detected by the Base Unit use another USB memory stick or transfer data via Ethernet see user manual of the 6000 or 8000 Base Unit to access the internal memory via a PC In case of errors the icon is displayed The stick is not formatted The stick has been removed without prior EJECT USB key use and some applications are still using it If the size of the free space is not correct the USB memory stick must be formatted Press the SYSTEM button b Successively select Expert Tools gt Media Utilities gt Usbflash Format Confirm your choice to format the USB memory stick Once form
112. Graphical User Interface Overlay trace function 1ssonm lus 94 ENE P E 0 439dBi Zoom pE Ert i A giit y asang C Shit aiin CI Cursor A 4Cursor B OS4ISSOlUSOE Olrace s sEvent Wam pass y Ones conse iB wlrace oTable SEER ES HO HB Summary Zoom Refect d Slope dBikm Lenghm T L Aas Set Event Advanced EJsmoron GJmu oror GJ0c0 oTpr 4 Fig 18 Example of overlaid traces To display up to 8 traces from the memory deleting the current trace or traces already loaded 1 Press the FILE button 2 On the Menu Explorer key select Explorer Select the files of the traces for display see Multiple selection of files page 262 4 Press the Load key Press View traces or Load traces config as the traces are loaded they cease to be highlighted in the list of files 6 When loading is complete the Results screen appears the first trace selected is the active trace the other traces being overlaid The traces are shown in different colors the active trace is green Their serial numbers are repeated at the top of the screen The OTDR markers are referenced on the active trace by the symbol l and on the other traces by vertical dashes With one or more traces already displayed to add further traces to the display the number of traces displayed cannot exceed 8 Press the FILE button and in the Explorer menu select the files of the traces to be ad
113. IL ORL under test Fig 104 Connections User Manual 780000102 16 235 Chapter 13 Multi Test Access Unit Use of the script specific client option This function requires use of separate broadband light source at A N the far end Launching the 1 Push the ScRIPT key to access the menu Script 2 Select the Link characterization script 3 Press START to launch it exevaeune E Und Charsctertration Fig 105 Page Script 4 The script will allow to select within the test functions available in the 8000 platform 5 Using a keyboard enter the Job configuration cable commis sioning ring and link documentation Imtina a Comma ites teagan ten Caim comamvemmmng Ter Span werg Available test amp One mira vat Yee ended ow functions maniem rroen A Cara isibe re lasittoro z at Geevtne z Job amp Link insi wane LI par macek E escription J dhuna a o Pa mas en DAA wes em Rents Fase T t J j j p 2i Lm Qemuewae Vol raa B Fig 106 Test Sequence configuration 236 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 13 Multi Test Access Unit Use of the script specific client option 6 The contents of the summary table which is always available will depend on the available test functions the user will be able to define the fields to display by using the key Select results to display ieee Lae 1H Nees A Rhenmeve CON ot Any 8 tH E me se Fig 107 Summary table c
114. Inserting a dialog box Inserting a message Inserting a pause Renaming a macro 274 You may insert in your macro a special dialog box a message or a pause These features will be very useful to you They will give you some time to switch to another fiber if necessary let you play a macro to a partial state and stop or simply just bring your attention after or before a specific action is performed To access all these features click on SCRIPT during the learning process of a macro just like if it was done Several soft keys will become avail able Click on the soft key Insert Dialog Box The dialog box editor is displayed Enter the content of your dialog box and press confirm when you are done Click on the soft key Insert Message The Message text editor is displayed Enter the content of your message and press confirm when you are done NOTE Dialog boxes and messages serve different purposes when the macro is played back A message will just appear to bring your attention to a specific point and wait until you are ready to continue A dialog box will give you the choice between continuing to play the macro or aborting it letting you partially play a macro in some cases Click on the soft key Insert Pause This action will automatically make the macro wait for a user action NOTE During playback you can see the icon MII when a pause is encoun tered Press any key to restart the playback Whether you just cr
115. Installing a new version of the software 28 NOTE The software versions list does not always appear cf previous ver sions as well as the Show Previous Next Choice buttons and the Confirm Continue key In this case the upgrading starts automati Cally Upgrading begins The Base Unit is automatically rebooted Upgrading takes several minutes At the end the Base Unit is auto matically restarted if the boot version is superior to version 01 16 Installation You must be equipped with a USB memory stick with a minimum capacity memory stick A USB memory sticks can be very different They differ on Hw and Sw aspects even inside a given brand In particular USB memory sticks targeting audio recording are often formatted in very specific ways and the format is often very different from a standard FAT For all these reasons we advise users to use memory sticks provided by JDSU In any case USB memory sticks which are recognized by the MTS a beep is generated when plugged on the MTS but which cannot be read or written should be formatted on the MTS with the Usbflash Format utility in Expert tools gt Media utilities If a problem occurs with the USB stick you are using contact your Local Technical Assistance Center Before installing the upgrade you must format the USB memory stick steps 1 to 5 1 Insert the memory stick into one of the sockets on the Base Unit provided for this purpose 2 Switch on th
116. Lau Cary Eolco Gaus Fig 71 Example of display of two curves Functions lt Add Slope gt or lt Add Disp gt depending on the first trace available displayed The screen is divided into two parts for the simultaneous display of the dispersion and slope curves User Manual 780000102 16 181 Chapter 10 CD measurements using pulse delay method Making a chromatic dispersion measurement 182 lt Delete Slope gt or lt Delete Disp gt Returns to the display of the dispersion or the slope alone lt Trace Table gt Displays the trace alone the table alone or both depending on the boxes marked When both are requested the size of the trace is reduced so as to display 8 lines of results in the table lt Cursor A Cursor B gt The cursor or cursors selected are displaced along the trace by means of the and keys The displacement step is as defined in the configuration menu of the CD test Results Inc Wavelength The result corresponding to the position of the cursor on the trace is highlighted in the table lt Wavelength gt When the function is activated the 4 and keys cause the table of results which may contain up to 512 lines to scroll across the screen The active cursor then follows this displacement on the trace Result linked to cursor Displacement of cursor Scrolling of the table Fig 72 Example of display of the table Alarms Results lying outside the thresholds selecte
117. Lucent Truewave 1 47320 SpecTran SM 1 46810 Litespec 1 46700 ATT SM 1 46700 Fitel Furukawa 1 47000 Corning SMF DS 1 47110 Corning SMF LS 1 47000 Corning Leaf 1 46840 E SMF 1 46450 Unit km kfeet miles Alarms No Active used to set alarms User Manual 780000102 16 215 Chapter 12 OFI Module FOX Function File Storage parameters Establishing a 216 reference Loss enter the loss threshold for each wavelength in dB ORL enter an ORL threshold for each wavelength in dB Delay enter a delay time in us Length indicative value changes according to the delay time and the fiber index To change the alarms values use the direction keys 4 and gt or the numeric keypad Filenaming Cable_ld Fiber_Num Fiber_Code Auto Store Yes cannot be modified Fiber Nbr Increment Yes cannot be modified In the FOX function the measurement results are automatically saved the fiber number is automatically incremented To display the fiber to be tested push the START STOP button in the results page of the FOX function see Choosing the fiber to be tested page 221 Before making a power a ORL and or distance measurement with the FOX function of the OFI module you have to take references 1 On the RESULTS page push the References button Different references can be taken For a loss measurement Side by Side reference Loopback reference Foran O
118. Manual 780000102 16 107 Chapter 7 Optical Spectrum Measurement WDM OSA test configuration 108 Acquisition Parameters a NOTE With 507XXX series and 81XXX series modules a warning message appears and the signal is cut off when the power of a channel is greater than 10 dBm or when the composite power of the input signal is greater than 20 dBm Input port This line only appears when the OSA 303 module is used The choices are A acquisition on port A B acquisition on port B A B acquisition on both ports Acquisition band only appears when 81WDMPMD module is used OESCL Acquisition will be performed on full band SCL Acquisition will only be performed on S C and L bands Sweeps Continuous there will be a measurement with refreshment of the trace and real time display of results Single there will be one single measurement and the display of its results Statistics in this mode the number of samples concerned by statistics must be entered next parameter Filtering only appears for OSA modules with channel isolation drop option OSA XX1 and OSA 302 Drift for measuring power wavelength and signal to noise ratio over time The number of sweeps and the wait time between the sweeps need to be set NOTE For Drift measurements a Grid needs to be defined and the Channel Detection parameter is set to Grid User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 7 Optical Spectr
119. OSA etc can be traces in overlay displayed simultaneously in overlay To obtain a display of multiple traces two methods are possible Select all the files to be loaded at the same time see chapter Multiple selection of files on page 262 Add a trace at the same interval as those already displayed by means of the Add Trace s key Link Manager Function The Link Manager function is available using the LINK MGR key and allows to display the explorer with all the link information for the active application Click as many times as necessary on the key MENU EXPLORER LINK MaR to select FIBER INFO and display the corresponding files for the active tab me NOTE The Fiber Info function is only available with the OTDR CD OSA PMD AP and FOX functions 266 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 15 File management Link Manager Function For exemple if the Link Mgr function is selected in the tab OTDR only the link information from the OTDR files will be displayed wether in multi mode or singlemode Tab selected Fig 130 Link Manager function with OTDR files only According to the application selected the fiber information available are different The table below describes the fiber information displayed for each selected tab eee NOTE The files in the Link Manager window can be sorted according each column available for a tab Table 2 Fiber Information displayed
120. RL measurement Power emitted reference Zero ORL NOTE As the ORL is an option establishing a reference for this measure ment is not automatically available with the OFI module User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 12 OFI Module FOX Function Establishing a Before any measurement you must establish references reference for Two methods can be used to take references taking a side by side refer loss measure ence and taking the reference in a loop back mode ment Taking a side by side reference mes NOTE This reference can only be performed when the two Base Unit are at the same location 1 On the RESULTS page push the References key 2 Push the Loss Side Side key 3 Link the FOX connectors of the two Base Units by using two jumpers 4 Push on Go key Reference date Type and serial number of the distant instrument Fig 91 Taking a side by side reference 8000 series example Once the references are taken the reference screen is updated for the wavelengths available on the distant instrument It indicates the type of reference used The date of the reference as well as the type and serial number of the distant instrument are indicated on the first line of the table If the reference is correct disconnect the jumpers at the middle point in order to insert the fiber to be tested User Manual 780000102 16 217 Chapter 12 OFI Module FOX Function If the reference taken is not correct take a ne
121. RT STOP key to stop the laser Optical link loss Setting the zero value of the power meter measurements where accuracy is required as the noise from the pho It is important to set the zero of the power meter before making any A N todiode fluctuates over time and with variations in temperature 1 Fix the plug over the optical input of the power meter so that no light can reach the photodiode of the power meter If the zero adjustment is made without this plug an error message may be displayed as the photodiode will detect too much light 2 Inthe Results page press the Zero soft key Carrying out the reference measurement 1 Fix the adapter corresponding to the jumper to the optical connector of the power meter User Manual 780000102 16 213 Chapter 12 OFI Module FOX Function 2 Connect the jumper between the input of the power meter and the output of the source 3 Configure the same wavelength on the source and the power meter The power measured is displayed in the results page of the LTS 4 Press the Set as Reference soft key to save the result displayed as reference value Measurements on the fiber under test After defining the reference value proceed as follows to make the measurement 1 Fix the jumpers and connectors needed to connect the fiber to be tested between the source output and the power meter input In the set up menu select dB units The power displayed in the Power Meter window corresponds to the
122. S console by selecting Windows gt Start bottom right of the PC screen gt All programs gt Accessories gt Command prompt c Then type the command subst N C upgrade d Close the DOS console This command will create a virtual drive N N is an example 5 Go to the driver using Windows Explorer 1 N may be replaced by another letter if necessary and 8000_Base_Upgrade corresponds to the directory where the upgrade files have been unzipped User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 2 Getting started Installing a new version of the software Double click on the exe file A window called Winzip self extractor will appear Check that the folder is correct i e the C drive or the newly created N drive is appearing Name then press Extract If not click on Browse in order to select the right drive then click on Extract WinZip Setf Extractor Appii 06 EJ ey Fig 14 WinZip Self Extractor 10 11 12 The message All files extracted ok is displayed and invites you to click on OK Press OK Run TFTPD32 exe note the Server Interfaces address which appears in the TFTPD32 window Note TFTPD32 exe is one of the extracted files Run FTP server exe An error message will appear click on OK Note FTPServer exe is one of the extracted files The window Pablo s FTP server is displayed Click on the green arrow or select menu File gt Start On the Base Unit press the SYST
123. SYSTEM Ctrl Y SET UP Ctrl U PRINT Ctrl P FILE Ctrl F RESULTS Ctrl R START STOP Ctrl S SCRIPT Macro Ctrl M qaypv eto Menu keys 1 to 7 from top to bottom F1 gt F7 36 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface Functions relating to display of a trace Function on the Base Unit External keyboard SAVE AND QUIT EXIT Entr e Enter QUIT WITHOUT SAVING ABORT Escape Echap 1 Editing text using the external keyboard The print key is not available on the MTS T BERD 6000 however the function is available on the Platform by pushing simultaneously left and right arrow keys To use the external keyboard to insert a name or identification in the set up menus or a Note in the table of results press Enter to go into the Edit menu type the text press Enter to leave the Edit menu Pressing the Esc key will close the Edit menu without saving the text Functions relating to display of a trace Display of the results on the trace The trace acquired or recalled from a memory is displayed on the Results page see example on Figure 16 on page 32 Various functions common to many plug ins OTDR OSA etc can be used to modify the display of the trace Cursors Zoom Shift Event Trace Trace Table Full scale etc The role of the direction keys and the confirmation key will depend on the function chosen Each event OTDR measurement or
124. Select the directory to open Select one file from the list a A OO N Click on EDIT gt EXPORT The txt file is automatically generated in the same directory as the one selected for the export The name by default for the txt file is fiber_info_ name of applica tion selected txt For exemple for the export of the Fiber Informa tion from the OTDR application the txt file will be called fiber_info_otdr txt This txt file is made of two parts The Header with general information the equipment used and its serial number the date and time of export the location of the file and the number of files exported User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 15 File management CD Rom burning MTS T BERD 8000 only The table countaining all the fibers information coming from the files of the active tab Filename Header of the txt file Recall of the Fiber In formation displayed on gt the 8000 Base Unit except alarm status Fig 131 Exemple of a directory exported in a txt file open with Excel CD Rom burning MTS T BERD 8000 only 1 Go to the file explorer 2 Select the directory and or the files to burn on the CD 3 Click on Edit 4 Click on Copy or Cut If you cut the file s to save it to on the CD they will not be on the AN Base Unit anymore 5 Click on CD R tools User Manual 780000102 16 269 Chapter 15 File management CD Rom burning MTS T BERD 8000 only 270 6
125. Shift Trace Event Trace Table Summary Full Scale etc See page 37 See Overlaying several traces stored in memory on page 41 for overlay of traces The reflectometry trace is displayed with a dotted vertical line set on the end of launch cable if the Launch Cable is defined in the SETUP menu and a dotted vertical line on the end of fiber NOTE At the end of an acquisition a beep is emitted in case of alarm Client specific option Fiber identification box TR management for Verizon MTS T BERD 6000 only The TR box allows to automatically identify the number of the end of fiber If this number is not the same as the fiber detected the user will be advised of this incoherence Each event detected is referenced under the trace by a serial number The results of the measurements of attenuation reflectance and slope can be marked on the trace Depending on the choice made in the SETUP menu on Result Screen gt Results on Trace it is possible to show on the trace No results All results value and position or only the markers showing the position of the events measured User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Events When there is saturation for a reflective event the maximum value measured is displayed with the sign gt This shows that the actual reflec tance is greater than the value shown for example if R gt 29 5 dB is displayed the reflectance could be 18 dB
126. TDR laser Select Yes if a 221 box is used between the two Base Units Select No if this box is not used If Yes is selected on one equipment do not forget to configure the second one to Yes as well If Yes has been selected reboot both units the local and the remote one Default value No Alarms the alarms applie to the measurements average and not to the measurements for each side as it is in the classical OTDR mode To access the files configuration menu of the OEO OTDR tab press the button FILE Related parameters are then displayed All parameters to describe the files the fiber and the link are proposed in order to save all measurements Please refer to File configuration menu page 246 Only differences are presented in this chapter User Manual 780000102 16 91 Chapter 6 Bi directional OTDR Performing a bi directional measurement File Type This option allows to choose to save a bi directional measurement under two different formats see File management page 100 A OEO file The bi directional measurement is saved in a single file Two SOR files The bi directional measurement is saved in two different SOR files w NOTE For best use it is recommended to use the auto file naming with fiber code origin end lambda fiber name and auto store These parame ters are applied on the master Base Unit Performing a bi directional measurement Process The Process page displays the
127. The Base Unit is automatically rebooted Upgrading takes several minutes During this stage do not remove the USB stick At the end the is automatically restarted if the boot version is superior to version 01 16 User Manual 780000102 16 Graphical User Interface This chapter describes the graphical user interface of the Base Unit used with the optical measurement plug ins OTDR WDM etc The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows Display screen on page 32 Using an external keyboard mouse and screen touch options on page 35 Functions relating to display of a trace on page 37 Overlay trace function on page 40 Saving when the instrument is shut down on page 43 User Manual 780000102 16 31 Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface Display screen Display screen The display screen is divided into a number of different zones Starting from the top these are a status bar in which various icons indicate the current functions a bar displaying a scaled down representation of the trace showing the zoom zone and the parameters of the measurement on display signature of the measurement the main part of the screen displaying a menu or the page of results tabs enabling the user to switch from one function to another OTDR WDM power meter etc as required At the right hand side of the screen softkeys give access to the various commands Their action depends on the cu
128. XXXX H Op AE FI Bl IE as WIRE E FE BE Ph ERRE m BE AS Ee CP ON BLF 25 EE P FN SR BE AR I PR A EA ER TEER A AE WRKRE RA Uk FSR AN ET FE Bl GO AL TH o TE 9 BR SP FP A H SLE A P BEE IE TE aS EEA KRAKA ERR ABABA MTR HIFZ R ti Pb K Hg Cd WU R CR SRI K PBB ZR RAE PBDE EBL O O Ell Fs Be A x DEUE WRD O eat at O fe O O O O GIRL ie 0 0 O O Oo BAJ fo fe re fo BLE O O fe We 0 0 O Oo O oO Je Fi Be x Oo O Oo 0 oO Fe lik Sh oe TE A I FLAK SERAF 0 PRE Oo 0 0 Oo 0 oO A lo O SR E RANE He ok O O O O O O FEVE EAE AED A A O 0 Ek All i E O O O O O O FE A MHE O i o 0 O o O KRZA BEAT KW EEA RAE EA A EE A EE SJ T11363 2006 X RRA EA HW D CE KA EE I A EL H e E SJ T11363 2006 User Manual 780000102 16 315 Appendix A RoHS Information Concerned products PMD and WDM 8100 Modules Series 316 User Manual 780000102 16 Index A Accessories 303 Adapter reference 309 switch 20 types 19 Attenuation 14 69 207 Attenuation profile acquisition parameters 157 configuration 156 measurement 159 measurement parameters 158 measurement procedure 161 results displa
129. Ye ey AT e a em ame sem a i 4 ame ome v7 nez 1 lA p e a m a a a a y EZ me e ame Fig 110 The results summary is filled in with the last 5 fiber measurements and the user can scroll up and down to view the other fibers tested The data are automatically saved in one directory 238 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 13 Multi Test Access Unit Use of the script specific client option CJMTS 8000 B harddisk Pa ripen isso Abert Pz ripen ie2oe B Acabe e s ripenori__oe B Garess1 A Pa npenor i race B Gaig4e3 7 Ba Jripenori nace as Pa Ca JAEn aoe Gafibert ra FIBER OE a Fig 111 Directory automatically generated All raw OTDR CD PMD and AP traces are saved 5 per fiber 1310 OTDR 1550 OTDR PMD The test set automatically creates a txt file which saves Loss ORL CD PMD and AP results in pre formatted columns This file can be opened ona PC with a spreadsheet program e g Excel j Job Information 5 7 OTDR Results i CD Results z 7 PMD Results 4 AP Results emn Ie gt Fig 112 Example of txt file opened via Excel User Manual 780000102 16 239 Chapter 13 Multi Test Access Unit Use of the script specific client option 240 User Manual 780000102 16 Broadband source BBS This chapter describes the function of the BBS Broadband Source module and its use The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows
130. a 10 error in the dispersion measurement Chromatic dispersion is one of the most important characteristics of a fiber it depends principally on the method of manufacture Cable manu facturers take it into account in order to produce different types of cable designed for different applications and different needs such as standard fiber offset dispersion fiber or fiber with non zero dispersion offset Coefficient of Type of fibre Corresponding standard Single mode standard ITU T G 652 dispersion at 1550 nm 17 ps nm km Single mode offset dispersion ITU T G 653 0 ps nm km Single mode non zero offset dispersion ITU T G 655 3 ps nm km 10 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 1 Principles of measurement Principle of measurement of Chromatic Dispersion CD OTDR using pulse delay method iS g 52 2 s 2 a 20 4200 1300 1400 1500 anm Fig 7 Typical curves of the coefficient of distortion for different types of fibre ITU T standards impose measurement of the following parameters example with G 652 wavelength corresponding to zero dispersion ambda0 this must lie between 1300 nm and 1324 nm slope SO corresponding to Jambda0 0 093 ps nm2 km max two limit values of the coefficient of dispersion at wavelengths situ ated between 1260 nm and 1360 nm Chromatic dispersion is not dependent on the time and constraints of installation and it is relatively insensitiv
131. a possible break of the fiber Choosing the 1 Push the SETUP button function 2 inthe Acquisition parameters select the line Mode Select Fault Locator with the direction keys see Configuring the reflectometry test on page 46 User Manual 780000102 16 77 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Fault Locator Mode Test configuration Quick Link Testi eae eis Laser All Fiber End Auto Launch Cable Start No Index Of Refraction gt Bend Auto Unit Fig 32 Fault Locator Setup To automatically set the measurement parameters push Test Auto key To manually set the test in Fault Locator mode push the SETUP button Laser select the wavelength s on which measurement will be performed All measurements on all wavelengths will be performed Fiber End the attenuation threshold corresponael from 2 to 20 dB Modify the value using the direction keys or the numeric keypad The Auto position is recommended Launch Cable Start No No launch cable used Distance Manually enter the value using the numeric keypad with the Edit Number key Min 0 km Max 10km 32 81 Kfeet 6 22 miles or Set the active cursor value using the Set Cursor Distance key Index of Refraction Fiber refractive index You can choose one of the predefined value given for some cables see table page 53 manually define a refractive index either defining for each wavelength a refractive index between 1 30000 an
132. ace Config will display the traces recalling the config uration recorded in the file Thus the zooms cursors and parameters present at the time of acquisition will be used for the display This function also enables to recall and set the parameters defined in the screens corresponding respectively to the FILE and SETUP keys It is then possible to perform an acquisition under the same conditions as those of the trace recalled Ifthe Base Unit was equipped with a different module from the current one when the trace was acquired certain configuration parameters cannot be updated A message warns the user of this User Manual 780000102 16 265 Chapter 15 File management Link Manager Function If several traces are selected the configuration used will be that of the first trace Ifthe number of traces added and the number of traces present is greater than 8 then the last traces added will not all be taken into account The configuration cannot be recalled if the trace was not originally AN created by a Base Unit Load Trace Info The OTDR traces can also be loaded without the parameters defined in with OTDR files the screen displayed via the SETUP key only The key LOAD TRACE INFO will then display the OTDR traces recalling exclusively the File information such as the fiber name and number direction extremities etc See Figure 117 on page 246 Display of several Up to 8 traces in the same application OTDR
133. ace are shown the co ordinates of the points of intersection of the cursors A and B with the trace together with the distance between the two points When a selected cursor touches the right or left hand edge of the screen the trace starts to scroll horizontally to maintain display of this cursor If an unselected cursor has been moved off screen by a zoom it can be brought back on to the screen by selecting it and then pressing one of the direction keys 4 or gt It will then appear on whichever edge of the screen is closest to its position When the cursor function is selected the keys A and W move the trace vertically Two types of cursors can be defined 1 Cursor on X only a vertical bar is present 2 Cursor on X and Y there is a vertical bar and a horizontal bar The intersection between these two bars is placed on the trace To display the type of cursor selected click on Advanced Then select the key CursorX CursorY to modify the current choice Each click on this key will alternatively insert or delete the check mark against Cursor Y User Manual 780000102 16 Zoom and Shift functions Zoom function Shift function Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface Functions relating to display of a trace The Zoom function is used to analyze part of the trace in greater detail In association with Event OTDR or Channel WDM it enables rapid checking of a succession of events or channels The zoom is centred on the curs
134. age 156 AP Setup menu on page 156 AP Measurement on page 159 Performing a AP measurement on page 161 Display of AP results on page 162 File Management on page 165 It is assumed that you are familiar with the operation of the Base Unit and the Optical Broadband Source you are using User Manual 780000102 16 155 Chapter 9 Attenuation profile Recommended equipment Recommended equipment To perform a AP measurement the following equipment is recom mended Base Unit with a plug in or module as referenced above and associ ated optical connector OBS 55 or BBS2A or any other Optical Broadband Source with associated optical connectors Fiber scope with associated optical connectors Cleaning kit Two jumpers with associated optical connectors One coupler Communication tool either GSM or telephone or optical talk set AP Setup menu After connecting the fiber to be tested and all the equipment is switched on and ready for use you will then need to set up the Base Unit to perform an AP measurement To access the Attenuation Profile setup menu press the SETUP button on the Base Unit The different measurement parameters are displayed To modify a parameter use the direction arrow keys 4 et W The possible options will then be displayed To change an option use the direction arrow keys and gt to make a choice ias 0 me Fig 60 Configuration menu for AP
135. age 300 BBS plug ins on page 300 OFI plug ins on page 301 Warning on page 302 User Manual 780000102 16 283 Chapter 18 Technical specifications Reflectometer plug ins Reflectometer plug ins Characteristics of reflectometry measurements Measurement of distance Measurement of attenuation Measurement of reflectance 284 Dual cursor Distance displayed takes into account the calibration of the refrac tive index of the fiber Index adjustable from 1 30000 to 1 70000 in steps of 0 00001 Resolution of display 1 cm max Resolution of cursor 1 cm max Spacing of measurement points from 4 cm with up to 128 000 acquisition points Accuracy 1m sampling resolution 10 x distance excluding errors of calibration of refractive index of the fiber Dual cursor Resolution of display 0 001 dB Resolution of cursor 0 001 dB Linearity 0 05 dB dB 0 05 dB for SR SRe and UHD plug ins 0 03 dB dB for LR VLR VSRE MR SRL and CWDM plug ins Resolution of display 0 01 dB Accuracy 4 dB 2 dB for LR VLR VSRE MR SRL and CWDM plug ins 1 Specified for pluse 1 us User Manual 780000102 16 Automatic measurement Manual Measurement OTDR plug ins measurement Chapter 18 Technical specifications Reflectometer plug ins Automatic measurement of all the elements of the signal Slope measurement by least squares or 2 points of measurement
136. ame can consist of up to 40 characters However beyond a AN Unit the end being replaced by 248 User Manual 780000102 16 Name of a file A Auto store File Type Fiber Description Chapter 15 File management File configuration menu After an acquisition and as long as the result has not been saved the line below Filenaming gives the name made up in accordance with the filenaming rules If the file has been recalled from a memory the line below Filenaming shows its name irrespective of whether it respects the current filenaming rules This name can then be modified by calling up the edit menu using the button gt If a modification is then made to the filenaming rules the file name will not be modified To return to a name made up in accordance with the filenaming rules simply delete the existing name Editing the name enables the trace to be saved in a new file with a new name but it cannot rename the existing file this function is pos sible in the Explorer menu see Storage media on page 257 Thus the new name will not be taken into account until the trace is saved again If this option is validated the trace or traces resulting from each acquisi tion are automatically saved according to the filenaming rules When two OTDR traces or more are displayed in overlay you can choose to save them in one single file or several files Sor files each trace will be saved with the sor extension Example
137. appropriate compensators can be incorporated along the link to neutralize its effect These compensators introduce negative delay values to bring the system back within the permissible limits of CD Telcordia gives their specifications in the document entitled GR 2854 CORE Generic Requirements for Fiber Optic Dispersion Compensators Source function 186 The CD module can also be used as a light source In this case connect the fiber into which you wish to inject the light from the source to the output connector of the CD plug in To configure the CD plug in as a light source 1 Go into the SETUP menu of the OTDR tab of the CD plug in 2 Select Mode Source All the menus of the OTDR are then grayed out except the laser line User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 10 CD measurements using pulse delay method Source function 3 On the Laser line select the wavelength desired for the source the 4 wavelengths used for CD are available to choose from 4 Press the START STOP key to start or stop the laser User Manual 780000102 16 187 Chapter 10 CD measurements using pulse delay method Source function 188 User Manual 780000102 16 CD measurements using phase shift method The Chromatic Dispersion analyzer function using phase shift method is available thanks to the ODM module Optical Dispersion Measurement and is described in this chapter Topics discussed in this chapter are as follows Selection of the CD
138. arameters after which acquisition is carried out in four phases Phase 1 Choice of the best range to display the whole of the fiber under test User Manual 780000102 16 59 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Acquisition Phase 2 Choice of the ideal pulse width and of the acquisition time to qualify the fiber accurately for example the one that gives the best resolution for a given dynamic Phase 3 Display of the quality of the connection see Connection quality indicator on page 57 Phase 4 The elapsed averaging time and the number of averages calculated are displayed When the duration of acquisition has elapsed the automatic measurement is carried out mes NOTE The acquisition can be stopped at any moment by pressing the START STOP key Then an automatic measurement is performed 1550nm 30ns T mob2 1 LEMD glace A 1145 01m 14 572dB B 1145 01m 14 572dB bck A B 0 00m 0 000dB QZoom Shift F Cursor A Cursor B eo Trace oTable Summary Zoom Acquisition in progress Auto oooo M oio Advanced GJS Elapsed Number of Elapsed Remaining Total cquisition acquisition time averages calculated time acquisition time time Fig 26 Example of automatic acquisition At the end of Auto acquisition the parameters are automatically updated in the Acquisition menu Moreover a beep is emitted in case of alarm orization of the position of events on page 76 the measuremen
139. asurement to be performed with the BBS Module CD PMD or AP 7 Ifa CD measurement is selected the key Full Band SCL Band is displayed and allow to select the band Full band or only S C L Band 8 Make the connections of the BBS with the module lt a Fiber under test Ww Jumper Signal input socket on the ODM plug in Fig 115 Example of the BBS connection with an ODM Module The BBS is ready for a CD AP or PMD measurement See Chapter 8 on page 135 Chapter 9 on page 155 and Chapter 11 on page 189 to configure and perform the measurement User Manual 780000102 16 243 Chapter 14 Broadband source BBS Remote interlock connector Remote interlock connector The BBS module has been equipped with a remote interlock connector SMB type on its front pannel This is to protect the user from injury when using class IIIb light sources The use of a Remote Interlock system is specified with class IIIb sources by 21 CFR 1040 10 USA If the short circuit at the SMB connector is opened the broadband light source is switched off immediately and cannot be switched on until it is closed again mes NOTE Note that the BBS modules are of class 1M under the IEC 60825 1 2001 international standard Remote interlock connector Fig 116 Remote interlock connector 244 User Manual 780000102 16 File management The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows File configuration menu on
140. atted disconnect and reconnect the USB memory stick As for any media formatting please note that all data present on the USB memory stick will be irremediably lost User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 15 File management Explorer Function the move on the screen does not mean that writing of data into the memory is complete Some data may still be in a writing When a file is moved in the explorer of the Base Unit the end of process if the storage unit is removed prematurely USB memory stick disconnection Before disconnecting the USB memory stick always select a storage device different from usbflash select disk for example in the explorer Make sure you no longer have any running applications using the usbflash storage media The user must push the EJECT USB key which is available in File gt Explorer or Link Manager but also in Expert Tools gt Media Utilities The icon becomes X to indicate it can be removed safely In this state the USB stick cannot be used anymore The USB memory stick can then be disconnected from the Base Unit s USB port The disconnection of the USB memory stick produces one beep w NOTE If the Base Unit operates on battery and is switched off before the USB memory stick is properly disconnected all the applications using the usbflash storage media will be automatically turned off and the USB memory stick can be disconnected afterwards without any prob lem mes NOTE If the 8000 60
141. available 0 0 00 c eee eee 177 Placing of markers 0 0 0 00 0 c cee eens 178 Information displayed for the markers 178 Delay dispersion and slope results 180 Information displayed for the results 180 Choice of curve 0 0 00 ccc eee 181 Functions available 0 0 00 e eee eee 181 ALANIS isi Sects e tet hes erp aons pea tow Ai En ted gems Seta 182 Measurement of CD onasection 183 Acquiring a trace for CD measurement on asection 183 CD measurement on a section using stored traces 184 File Management 00 0 0c e ee eee eee eee 184 Storing CD measurements 0 00 eee eee 184 Recalling CD files 00000 ee eeeeee 185 CD standards and limits 0 eee eee 185 Source function 00 cece eee 186 Chapter 11 CD measurements using phase shift method 189 Selection of the CD function 000005 190 Configuring the CD test 00 e eee e eee eee 190 Acquisition parameters 0 0 eee eee 191 Measurements parameters 220020005 192 Results Screen parameters 0000 ee eee 193 Alarms ee a pase ae ect ence Sth ape ce thin Seen dea e 193 Wavelength Range 000 cece eee eee 193 Normalized to kM 0 cee eee 194 Show Measured Points 0000 0c ee eee 194 Show Fit Formula 0 0 tentea a eee ee 1
142. avelength displayed on the curve and in the table from 1265 0 nm to 1650 0 nm User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 10 CD measurements using pulse delay method Making a chromatic dispersion measurement Inc wavelength Choose wavelength difference between two results memorized in the table from 0 10 to 50 nm the number of results memorized depends on the limit values and the value of the increment chosen max 512 results Normalized to km Yes The dispersion value obtained is standardized to 1 km that is to say divided by the length of the fiber expressed in km Unit Select the unit to be used km kfeet miles metre feet Making a chromatic dispersion measurement Measurement This measurement is made in 3 stages PFOCESS 4 Detection of end of fiber by a reflectometry measurement This stage is indispensable if the length of the fiber is not known 2 Placing of markers on the End of fiber event a second reflectometry measurement in the end of fiber zone is made for the 4 wavelengths 1310 1480 1550 1625 nm The result is 4 Fresnels on which the markers are placed One of the Fresnels having been chosen as the reference the delay or advance of the others is measured with respect to this 3 Calculation of dispersion on the basis of the position of the markers see Method of CD measurement used by the Base Unit on page 12 Conditions of measurement To carry out a measurement of chromatic d
143. averaging 1550 nm with averaging 81 dBm without averaging at 30 dBm and 1550 nm excluding the uncertainty relating to the input connector 1590 nm from 0 to 40 dBm in the range of 1525 nm 1620 nm reference 1550 nm on the basis of the peak of a single carrier on the band 1530 nm 1605 nm at 0 dBm and with Dimensions Weight approx 500 g 1 1 Ibs and weight of WDM plug ins Length 211 Dimensions in mm without front panel Width 120 Height 27 PMD plug ins Typical values measured at 25 C unless specified otherwise Plug in 81PMD 81WDMPMD Measurement time independent of the 6 seconds PMD value Dynamic range Up to 45 dB DGD Measurement range 0 080 ps to 60 ps Type B Uncertainty 0 020 ps 2 PMD Repeatability 0 025 ps 1 within 1485 1640 nm without averaging 2 up to 150 ps for weak coupling 3 weak coupling for 0 1 ps to 60 ps DGD range up to 35 dB budget loss traceable to NPL standard User Manual 780000102 16 293 Chapter 18 Technical specifications CD OTDR plug ins CD OTDR plug ins Typical specifications of CD OTDR plug ins Typical values measured at 25 C unless otherwise specified CD specifications 5083 CD OTDR plug in Measurement time Manual Auto from 40 s throughout the wavelength range Dynamic up to 120 km Minimum distance 10 km Wavelength
144. ayed in the bar of the trace together with the difference in wavelength and power between the cursors lt Auto Marker gt Places the marker automatically at the peak of the reflective event of the active trace lt Manual Marker gt Places the marker on the active cursor If cursors A and B are both selected the marker will not be moved If the cursor is close to the marker the latter will be deleted lt Set Ref gt This key is grayed unless the zone of measurement chosen in the configuration menu is Section See Measurement of CD on a section on page 183 lt Exit gt Returns to the preceding result selection screen Delay Dispersion Slope User Manual 780000102 16 179 Chapter 10 CD measurements using pulse delay method Making a chromatic dispersion measurement Delay These results depend on the choices made in the configuration menu dispersion and upper and lower wavelengths incrementation step and standardization to 1 km slope results Information The result screen obtained after pressing one of the keys lt Delay gt displayed for the lt Dispersion gt or lt Slope gt displays the same standard information see results Information always displayed on page 176 together with the following information The curve requested delay dispersion or slope is displayed Alline of characteristics specific to the measurement of slope delay and dispersion is displayed above the trace
145. bi directional measurement steps the Display Curve page displays the traces and results and the Summary page displays a summary of the results in a table and the alarms result if alarms have been configured in the Setup page In order to display the Process page make sure you are currently under the OEO OTDR tab and press the key RESULTS The key View Curves View Process allows to change from the Curve page to the Process page and vice versa In order to select and follow the status of a measurement go to the Process page Gees NOTE When a measurement has been started the slave Base Unit automat ically displays the Process page The Process screen is divided in three zones 1 Information zone Representation of the local Base Unit with identification Representation of the distant Base Unit with identification 1 includes the serial numbers of the mainframe and module as well as available wavelengths 92 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 6 Bi directional OTDR Performing a bi directional measurement Status of the data connection grayed when the link has been cut or the connection not yet established yellow when the connection is operational Status of the fiber connection this is the status of the last tested fiber The fiber is represented cut and is grayed if the two units are not connected on the same fiber If the two units are connected on the same fiber the link does not appear cut When a
146. ble to the right of this option appears when Auto Values is set to Yes This table lists the available transport rates that can be used To make a choice use the direction arrow keys lt and gt User Manual 780000102 16 171 Chapter 10 CD measurements using pulse delay method Configuring the CD test 1st analysis window Min wavelength Max wavelength 172 Auto values No Threshold values are entered manually select the analysis band and the max dispersion threshold Analysis Band This option appears when Auto Values is set to No Select 1550 nm or C L band The max dispersion threshold will be considered only on that channel or band Disp Max ps nm This option appears when Auto Values is set to No Select here the max dispersion threshold from lt 200 to lt 90000 ps nm NOTE Max dispersion threshold is always considered on non normalized dispersion values The results are given in the form of curves delay dispersion slope and a table of results of which 8 lines are displayed if the Table function is selected This parameter can be change exclusively if Auto Mode has been selected in the acquisition parameters Choose the curve which will by displayed automatically at the end of the acquisition Markers reflectometry curves with markers Dispersion dispersion curve Lower limit of the wavelength displayed on the curve and in the table from 1255 0 nm to 1640 0 nm Upper limit of the w
147. button On the file configuration page to change from one tab to the other press the FILE button NOTE There is a tab for each different type of measurement OTDR SM OTDR MM OSA Power Meter The tab of a function is displayed if and only if a plug in corresponding to this type of measurement has been inserted in the instrument or if a file of the type of this measure ment is open If two plug ins of the same measurement type are present then only one plug in is active so only one tab will appear for this measurement To change the active plug in go to the SYS TEM screen and select it there A small icon may appear in the left corner of each tab according to the status of the corresponding module B4JSM OTDR E4JOEO OTDR f5a5 LTS The icon signification is the following Noicon the function is used in a read only mode no module or the module has not been selected Gray icon the function has been selected but the corresponding module does not currently perform an acquisition Green icon the function has been selected and the corresponding module currently performs an acquisition The 7 softkeys at the side depend on the current configuration and the context Their use is symbolized by an icon shows that the action is immediate when the key is pressed shows that the key gives access to a sub menu shows that the key will quit the sub menu green direction keys shows that
148. c 1 Click on the FILE key 2 Select Setup with the key Setup Explorer 3 Modify the parameters you want 4 Click on Store Trace The Chromatic Dispersion traces are stored with the extension CD User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 10 CD measurements using pulse delay method CD standards and limits Recalling CD Once a CD file has been stored recall it using the Explorer files 1 Select Explorer with the key Setup Explorer 2 Using directions keys select the directory and then the file to open 3 Click on Load 4 Click on View Tace s or Load Trace Config The selected file is opened For further informations on file management see Chapter 15 File management CD standards and limits Measurements of chromatic dispersion are only necessary in the following cases Adaptation of of existing networks to transmission speeds of 10 Gbits s or more Installation of new fiber networks for transmission speeds of 10 Gbits s or more Qualification of fibers and components by manufacturers The conditions required for measurements of CD are invariably linked to transmission speeds per channel and at the corresponding distance Chromatic dispersion is also an important parameter for fibers with offset dispersion ITU T G 653 as the zero dispersion wavelength must not be in the range of the channels this would generate 4 mixed waves and would oblige consequent irregular spacing between channels Standards
149. cal Spectrum Measurement WDM OSA test configuration Wait Period The Wait Period parameter allows to enter a wait period before the measurement start only active if Long Term is positioned on lt Period gt Increments of 5 seconds up to 1 minute then increments of 1 minute up to 10 minutes then increments of 5 minutes up to 60 minutes then increment of 1 hour up to 24 hours Measurement parameters Those parameters are only linked to the current active fiber Type I OSNR only valid for OSA 320 Module is used for measuring the true in band OSNR by using the polarization nulling method This mode is recommended for OSNR measurements in ROADM based networks See Testing ROADM networks p 131 WDM Module is used to measure the optical spectrum of an optical signal Standard WDM results are displayed in the results table See Display of the WDM OSA results p 117 EDFA Module is used to analyze results from an EDFA EDFA results are displayed in the results table See EDFA results analysis p 127 DFB Module is used to analyze results from a DFB DFB results are displayed in the results table See DFB results analysis p 129 Channel Detection Grid The grid serves as a detection reference it must therefore be Regular Manual ITU DWDM or ITU CWDM The choice of grid takes priority over the choice Channel Selection For example it is not possible to choose Channel selection Grid
150. channel WDM measurement detected is represented under the trace by a serial number The results of the measurements can be written on the trace Depending on the options chosen in the SETUP menu on Result Screen gt Results On Trace it is possible to show on the trace foran OTDR measurement No results or All the results value and position or only the markers showing the position of the events measured User Manual 780000102 16 37 Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface Functions relating to display of a trace 38 Cursors Positioning the cursor Selection of the type of cursor When there is saturation for a reflective event OTDR measurement the maximum value measured is displayed with the sign gt This shows that the actual reflectance is greater than the value shown for example if R gt 29 5 dB is displayed the reflectance could be 18 dB The reflectance of a ghost event OTDR measurement is displayed in brackets on the trace The vertical cursors A and B are used in the Zoom and Shift functions to position or delete markers The cursors A and B are represented by vertical lines of different colors ina solid line if the cursor is selected ina dotted line if the cursor is not selected When a trace is displayed the key lt Cursor A Cursor B gt can be used to select one or both cursors The direction keys 4 and gt move the selected cursor s along the trace Above the tr
151. create a note To enter a note Inthe table select the channel Press the Table Contents key then press Notes Enter the text of the note and confirm its creation Press the Exit key to return to the previous menu if necessary NOTE The table notes are not stored in the measurement results Displaying relative results By default the table gives the results in absolute values To obtain these results in relative values with respect to a reference channel Press the Table Contents key then Relative gt lt Absolute to select Relative Move the cursor on to the channel that is to serve as the reference Press the Define Ref Channel key The results are recalculated with respect to this channel of reference NOTE On quitting this menu the table automatically reverts to the display of absolute values User Manual 780000102 16 123 Chapter 7 Optical Spectrum Measurement Channel filtering Channel filtering Field of application Configuration 124 This option is only available for OSA XX1 and OSA XX3 modules It is used to filter out one particular channel and extract it via a port called the drop port NOTE For Dual Port OSA 210 and OSA 303 only the input port B can extract a channel to the drop port To obtain filtering of a given canal to the drop port go into the SETUP menu of the OSA module Choose Acquisition then Sweeps and select Filtering The opti
152. d 1 69999 The selection of an index modify the section AB value real distance between the cursors A and B or if you know the real distance between cursors A and B entering this value in the Section AB line to know the refractive index of the fiber This distance selection allows to display the indices The extremes values of 78 User Manual 780000102 16 Starting the test Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Fault Locator Mode the distance are given by those of the indice 1 30000 a 1 70000 Bend singlemode only Select the bend maximum value in dB or select Auto Unit Distance unit km kfeet miles metre feet Push the START STOP button The test configuration starts automatically Then a baragraph indicates the test progress and the number of acquisitions done You can stop the test at any time pushing the START STOP button Once the test is finished the instrument measures the end of fiber distance and display it with the unit chosen The Total Loss is also displayed i 2 2274008 A a d of Fiber 2 01 km Total Loss 2 46 dB Ssuomi ESotooiow irs Fig 33 Fault Location NOTE If a problem occurs during acquisition two types of message can be displayed on screen Fiber End not found fiber length is too long for the OTDR used etc No fiber connected Under the trace in the blue line are displayed the ORL value of the link the Launch Cable
153. d by the user in the Alarm field Max dispersion will be displayed in red in the table and the icon 3 will appear at the top right of the screen If all the results lie within e thresholds no result is in red the icon becomes Py User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 10 CD measurements using pulse delay method Making a chromatic dispersion measurement Measurement of The CD method provided by the Base Unit allows to measure the CD CD on a section t only of the entire link but also of sections of the fiber This feature may be useful if 2 different types of fibers are used on one link To make such a measurement the section must be separated by specific events such as reflective events or Fresnel like connectors The different measurements must be performed with the same mod AN ule Acquiring a trace The process to measure the CD results of a section located between for CD event X and Y is as follows measurement on a section Select in the SETUP menu Measure area Section Select for the window analysis the distance to the X event Perform a CD measurement Save the trace FILE key see File Management on page 184 Select for the window analysis the distance to the Y event SETUP menu Perform a new CD measurement Load the trace having the CD results up to the X event by pressing Load followed by Load Measure Ref in the File menu You may now see the CD results for the spec
154. d source for PMD AP and CD measurements EOBS550 CD Modules CD plug ins Reference OTDR CD module 1310 1480 1550 1625 35 dB E5083 CD E50otdrExt CD options Reference Sources 1310 1480 1550 1625 DFB E508X LS CD accessories Reference Termination connector FC PC amp APC ETERM CD FC Termination connector SC PC amp APC ETERM CD SC Termination connector ST PC amp APC ETERM CD ST Termination connector E2000 HR amp HRL ETERM CD E2000 ODM Module ODM plug in Reference Combined long range CD PMD and AP measurement E81DISPAP 1260 1640 nm Long Range Chromatic Dispersion Module 1260 E81CD 1640 nm 1 Select one of the following Broadband Source EOBS550 or E81BBS2A ODM MR Module ODM MR plug in Reference ODM MR Medium Range plug in E81MRDISPAP 1 To be used with the Broadband Source EOBS500 User Manual 780000102 16 307 Chapter 19 Options and accessories References of measurement plug ins MTAU Modules MTAU plug ins 8100 series Multi Test Access Unit for 4 test modules E81MTAU4 1 Connector type must be specified OFI Modules OFI plug ins Reference 1310 1550nm OFI plug in module standard power E81260F1 1310 1550nm OFI plug in module high power E81260F 12 1310 1550 1625nm OFI plug in module standard power E81360FI1 1310 1550 1625nm OFI plug in module high power E81360F 12 1310 1490 1550nm OFI plug in module standard power E8132
155. ded see Multiple selection of files page 262 User Manual 780000102 16 41 Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface Overlay trace function 42 Press the Load key Press the Add Traces key as the traces are loaded they cease to be highlighted in the list of files When loading is complete the new traces are displayed in overlay with those that were already there me NOTE If the number of files selected exceeds the display capacity a mes sage gives warning that loading will be incomplete only the trace or traces selected first will be displayed up to the permitted limit of 8 traces Overlaying the To copy the current trace into the overlay memory proceed as follows current trace On the RESULTS page press the Advanced key then Overlay then Set New Trace The current trace is copied into the overlay memory represented in a different color it is automatically offset with respect to the new trace A new acquisition can then be started me NOTE In the case of Multi trace display with multiple wavelength acquisition when the START key is pressed all the traces displayed are deleted to leave room for the new acquisitions Swapping Measurements can only be made on the active trace and not on overlaid overlay traces traces To make measurements on a trace in overlay it must first be swapped with the active trace To do this press the Trace key then the lt and gt keys as many times as necessary Changing th
156. defined wavelengths The user must then select the inf wavelength to start with and the sup wavelength to end with Normalized tokm No Total CD results of the link in ps nm Yes CD results normalized to 1km calculated according to fiber length Show Measured Enables to displayed the acquisition points on the Delay curve repre Points sented by black crosses Yes All the measurement points will be displayed No The points will not be visible Show Fit Formula Displays the resulting approximation equation on the upper left side of the trace display Yes Equation is displayed No Equation is not visible Performing a Reference measurement It is recommended before performing a CD measurement at least once a day to carry out a reference measurement of the broadband source To perform a reference connect your Broadband source OBS 550 or 81BBS2A to the ODM module as shown below Coupler E Jumper Signal input socket situated on the ODM module Fig 76 CD Reference measurement 194 User Manual 780000102 16 1 Chapter 11 CD measurements using phase shift method Performing a Reference measurement Activate the source on the distant Base Unit and select CD func tion Select a errr Sa Band Fig 77 81BBS2A module activation 2 In the CD Setup page press the Acq Ref sofkey If ODM module with the CD function is used for the first time
157. ding the second file and proceed the same way to load the second file Results appear automatically in the table DFB results analysis DFB test configuration This feature only applies to instruments OSA XXX DFB results analysis allows to characterize DFB lasers by giving the corresponding SMSR Offset and bandwidth values see the measure ment principles in DFB analysis p 6 To configure the Base Unit in preparation for an DFB test press the setup button In the Measurements section set Type on DFB A new DFB sub menu is offered while other Setup parameters are the same for DFB as for WDM measurements Refer to WWDM OSA test configuration p 106 for a complete description User Manual 780000102 16 129 Chapter 7 Optical Spectrum Measurement DFB results analysis DFB sub menu Bandwidth level Level expressed in dBc where the main component bandwidth should be calculated Min SMSR Minimum offset value to consider to find the Side Mode Max SMSR Maximum offset value to consider to find the Side Mode DFB Measurement procedure measurements Use a patchcord to connect your DFB laser source to an input port of the OSA XXX module on the Base Unit Power on the DFB laser source Click START STOP to perform the acquisition The trace and corresponding results appear automatically after a few seconds Select which DFB you are working on oF oam me Fig 47 DFB measurements
158. dlog Silica dd 33 SOM KEYS inert ee et es Baier batt oo 34 ICONS mre pen es Weed te Poe alee epee de are eed aston E ae oA 34 Selection keyS 2 0 0 cee a 35 Color of the keyS 0 0 0 ccc eee eee 35 Using an external keyboard mouse and screen touch OPTIONS cians ester scars attain a nee ects ate arate Se ee 35 Virtual control buttons bar 0 2 0 0 eee eee 35 User Manual 780000102 16 viii Table of Contents Equivalence between external keyboard and Base Unit 36 Editing text using the external keyboard 37 Functions relating to display of a trace 37 Display of the results on the trace 0 4 37 CUISOFS s seca suede re ae e nep hatte hoe ep doe ae Sanda 38 Positioning the cursor 00000 0c eee eee 38 Selection of the type of cursor 00 0 cease 38 Zoom and Shift functions 0 cee eee ee 39 ZOOM FUNCION 24 8 atl he Pe Ae a eo aes 39 Shift UNGON 3 sces cede eh ed ode de Seer des 39 Zoom Auto OTDR easpa eian e a eee eee 40 Full scale OSA PMD AP 000 000 eee 40 Overlay trace function 0 cece eee eee eee 40 Overlaying several traces storedin memory 41 Display of traces in overlay 0 0 00 c eee eee 41 Adding traces in overlay 0 cece eee 41 Overlaying the current trace 0 0 00 e eee eae 42 Swapping overlay traces 0 eee eee 42 Changing the traces p
159. e Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Reference Trace function Once one or several trace s is are displayed after an acquisition or loaded from the explorer 1 If several traces are in overlay check the correct current trace is selected 2 Goin the Advanced menu 3 Click on Overlay 4 Click on Set Reset Ref key The active trace becomes the reference trace Reference trace Active trace the icon appears on the upper right hand part of the results table its number is displayed in red To define all the traces displayed as reference traces click on Set Reset All Ref key whatever is the active trace Removing the reference trace s To change one reference trace into a standard trace select it using the Trace Event key and in the Advanced gt Overlay menu click once again on Set Reset Ref To change all the reference traces displayed into standard traces whatever is the active trace go in the Advanced gt Overlay menu and click on Set Reset All Ref Performing an acquisition once one or several trace s is are defined Three situations can occur once an acquisition is performed Only reference trace s is are displayed the trace acquired is added to the reference ones Reference trace s and standard trace s are displayed the refer ence trace s are blocked the standard ones are removed and the new trace acquired is displayed with the reference one s No refer
160. e Base Unit Press the SYSTEM button 4 Successively select Expert tools gt Media utilities gt Usbflash Format Confirm your choice to actually format the USB memory stick Once formated disconnect the USB memory stcik from the Base Unit using the key Eject USB User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 2 Getting started Installing a new version of the software The icon X is displayed indicating the stick can be removed safely As for any media formatting please note that all data present on the A N USB memory stick will be irremediably lost Connect the USB memory stick to the PC Unzip the upgrade files on the PC and transfer it to the USB memory stick a Download and save on your PC the exe upgrade file that you can get from the web www jdsu com If the jds file has been chosen once it is downloaded on the PC do A N not forget to change its extension to exe b Once the transfer is completed double click on the exe file A window called Winzip self extractor will appear Check that the folder is correct i e the USB memory stick driver is appearing Name then press Unzip If not click on Browse in order to select the right USB drive WinZip Setf Extractor Appli 06 EJ UST ties oe tee cell etetos Ue te Omini tais per he Larp aston a a grs wey o as n im lt Qrerwene tes cates gery Fig 15 Winzip Self Extractor A message indicating the number of files that have been unzipped
161. e Once a trace is displayed in overlay the traces can be adjusted traces position according to the Y axis Y Reset all traces are on the the same level at the intersection with the active cursor Y Shift Each trace is shifted from 5 dB from the other Y Exact the traces displayed are on the same position according to their injection level User Manual 780000102 16 Trace resulting from the difference between two traces OSA module Removing a trace Removing the current trace in overlay Removing all the the traces in overlay Quitting the overlay menu Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface Saving when the instrument is shut down It is possible to obtain the trace corresponding to the point by point differ ence between the current trace and the trace in overlay if only two traces are displayed simultaneously To do this press the 2 Traces Diff key The screen will then display the two traces in overlay and the trace resulting from the Difference It is possible to remove a trace displayed To do this first select it see previous paragraph then press Remove Current Trace To remove all the traces except the current trace press the key Remove Other Traces To quit the overlay menu press the Exit key Saving when the instrument is shut down When the instrument is switched off all the parameters and all the traces are saved and will all be recalled at the next start up User Manual 78000010
162. e accessible in the Results page after pressing the keys Advanced then Manual Measurement User Manual 780000102 16 Measurements of slope Result of slope measurement Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Manual measurements To make a manual measurement of slope press the RESULTS button to call up the trace and then Place the cursor A at the beginning of the section of the trace where the slope is to be measured Place the cursor B at the end of this section Press the Advanced key then the Manual key then select Slope Press amp the slope of the specified trace section is displayed This green cross shows that an alarm threshold has not been exceeded emma 11 141088 B pico Tears Slope Reflectance Fig 30 Measurement results A yellow icon would indicate there is a Warning alarm thresholds are critical A red cross would indicate the alarm thresholds have been exceeded The result is displayed on the screen between the two slope indicators and The measurement results are also available in the table which you can display in its entirety by selecting the Table function after pressing Exit twice to quit Advanced mode In the table distance shows the distance between the beginning of the trace and the end of the slope User Manual 780000102 16 73 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Manual measurements Deleting a slope measurement Performing s
163. e acquisition in the PMD TEST SETUP menu see Sweep on page 138 Fiber Number of 5 j r Alarm Length Coupling Cable Identification File Name acquisitions indicator mm a e Laroo Agy l Sireng shiant 7 7 siauri naa aa WE Spectrum FFT mw 0959 Iu orter MLIO Uster Oo ps u order PMD Cort 01 pak Ded enter PRD Overy 406 pomm dred ender MD CoA 0 014 perm tae PISOAR PMD delay in PMD second PMD second PMD picoseconds order delay order coefficient Coefficient Fig 56 Example of a result obtained with the FFT method User Manual 780000102 16 147 Chapter 8 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement Display of results me NOTE When several acquisitions are performed the trace resulting from the last acquisition is displayed PMD trace with FFT method The trace represents the delay distribution trace in ps The results are displayed in black when no alarm is defined in green if alarms are within the threshold defined in the Setup menu and in red if the alarms exceed the thresholds defined Cursor within Spectrum display To move the cursor s on the trace press the Cursor menu key then use the direction arrow keys and W or q and gt The coordinates of each cursor intersection with the trace are indicated underneath the trace Zoom within Spectrum display In order to zoom in on the trace press the Zoom Shift menu key to display Zoom then use the direction arr
164. e and in the table of results mee NOTE If no result is displayed it is possible that the display threshold of the attenuation measurement result is higher than the attenuation that you are trying to measure or else in the SETUP menu you may have selected Results on Trace None or Graphics only mee NOTE If you try to measure a splice on a slope the measurement is not car ried out and the following error message is displayed Slope found between two cursors Manual itis possible to carry out an ORL measurement on a part of the fiber eSa EE Follow the following procedure to measure a part of the fiber o 1 Position the cursors A and B to delimit the section that you wish to measure User Manual 780000102 16 75 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Memorization of the position of events 2 Press the Advanced key then Manual Measurement then select ORL 3 Press The ORL will be measured for the section of trace defined ian aoe E EA B Eoo OTOR MacDo Fig 31 Result of ORL measurement ORL ona ifsaturation occurs during an ORL measurement the result is given with saturated trace the sign lt This means that the actual ORL value is less than the value displayed Memorization of the position of events This function is only available in Expert Mode To memorize the position of events with a view to repeating the measure ments at the same place during a future acquisition or o
165. e directory and then the file to open Click on Load A OO N Click on View Tace s or Load Trace Config to open a measure ment file Click on Open Ref to open a reference file For further informations on file management see Chapter 15 File management User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 11 CD measurements using phase shift method CD standards and limits CD standards and limits Measurements of chromatic dispersion are only necessary in the following cases Adaptation of of existing networks to transmission speeds of 10 Gbits s or more Installation of new fiber networks for transmission speeds of 10 Gbits s or more Qualification of fibers and components by manufacturers The conditions required for measurements of CD are invariably linked to transmission speeds per channel and at the corresponding distance Chromatic dispersion is also an important parameter for fibers with offset dispersion ITU T G 653 as the zero dispersion wavelength must not be in the range of the channels this would generate 4 mixed waves and would oblige consequent irregular spacing between channels Standards relating to chromatic dispersion Standard Description ITU T G 650 1 Definition and test methods for linear deterministic attributes of singlemode fiber and cable TIA EIA FOTP 175 B Measurement Methods and Test Procedures Chromatic Dispersion Calculation charts available A
166. e optical attenuator between the reflectometer and the link to be tested This attenuator enables the level of the trace to be adjusted so as to avoid saturation of the reflectometer by the reflection to be evaluated Principle of bi directional measurement If fibers with different mode field diameters core size etc are joined the resulting OTDR trace waveform can show a higher backscattering level This is due to the increased level of backscattered signal reflected back to the OTDR in the downstream fiber ALK Splice B K K K Backscatter Coefficient S Splice Attenuation Fig 2 Normal splice This phenomenon can occur when jointing different types of fiber in multi mode or 2 fibers with different backscattering coefficients User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 1 Principles of measurement Principle of WDM OSA analysis AK Splice iK B K Spice AK r x x a _ a aS Ee ae i KK K KAK S AK Kok KK M x Fig 3 Positive splice A gt B Negative Splice B gt A The sum gives the bi directional or average splice loss value _ S 1 82 Pie a Bi directionnal measurement consists in performing a measurement from the extremity of fiber A then another measurement from the extremity of fiber B finally get events of both traces and calculate the average for all slope splice and reflectance measurements Principle of WDM OSA analysis WDM Wavelength Division Multiplex technology is a ver
167. e showing typical backscattering From a backscatter trace it is possible in particular to determine the position of a section of fiber within a link The measurement result must reveal the attenuation the location of faults by their distance from a point of origin attenuation with respect to distance dB km the reflectance of a reflective event or a link User Manual 780000102 16 A Validity of Measurement Reflectance Chapter 1 Principles of measurement Principle of reflectometry measurements To locate faults a reflectometer measures only time Consequently group velocity must be introduced in order to determine the distance of the location This is done by introducing the refractive index of the fiber into the instrument UTI T in recommendations G 650 G 651 and G 652 give backscatter measurement as an alternative method for measuring attenuation the method of reference being the cut fiber The field of application of backscatter is not limited but the conditions for application of this method are nevertheless stipulated injection conditions Fresnel reflections must be limited at fiber input a high power source laser should be used receiver bandwidth should be chosen to achieve a compromise between pulse rise time and noise level backscatter power should be represented on a logarithmic scale Reflectance is a value with which the coefficient of reflection of a reflec
168. e the icon mg at the top of the screen You are now ready to record 4 Perform all actions you wish to record in your macro Click on SCRIPT when you are done and select End Macro You macro has now been saved 6 Enter the name of your new macro in the text editor and confirm NOTE All events are recorded wether you use the Base Unit buttons the soft keys the touchscreen a mouse or an external keyboard NOTE The speed of your actions is not really relevant See Macro playback page 276 This macro type shall be used to perform a template for multiple files To create a new file macro 1 Select a free position A sub menu automatically appears 2 Change the Macro type if necessary to set it on File Click on the soft key Learn You arrive directly to the FILE page You can read the message Load file to start learning at the top of the screen Select the file you want to work with to perform all actions 5 Load and view the corresponding trace You can now see the icon Mg at the top of the screen indicating that you are ready now to record 6 Perform all actions you wish to record in your macro Click on SCRIPT when you are done and select End Macro You macro has now been saved 8 Enter the name of your new macro in the text editor and confirm Notes for standard macros also apply for file macros User Manual 780000102 16 273 Chapter 16 Macros Macro recording Adding interaction to your macro
169. e to variations in temperature 0 0025 ps nm km C for the coefficient of dispersion 0 0025 ps nm2 km C for the slope The only external parameter that can affect it is the type of modulation of the signal itself most type DFB lasers have no external modulation to limit this effect Chromatic dispersion analyzers give the delay value of the optical link unit as a function of wavelength On the basis of this delay they calculate the coefficient of dispersion the dispersion slope and specific values such as the wavelength corresponding to zero dispersion and the asso ciated slope The principle of measurement of chromatic dispersion is described in document IEC 60793 1 42 as well as in ITU T recommendations G 650 and G 652 The calibration of the instrument is defined in document IEC 61744 Telcordia has also published GR 761 CORE requirements for chromatic dispersion analyzers User Manual 780000102 16 11 Chapter 1 Principles of measurement Principle of measurement of Chromatic Dispersion CD OTDR using pulse delay method Method of CD measurement used by the Base Unit 12 There are different methods for measuring chromatic dispersion The Base Unit measures the delay of propagation of pulses along the fiber due to specific reflective events such as connectors Fresnel doing this for four wavelengths 1310 1480 1550 amp 1625 nm One of these 4 measurements is chosen as a reference for calculatio
170. each band and channel channel name each channel me NOTE The maximum real number of channels for ITU grids depends on the value selected for the first channel and the spacing between the chan nels NOTE It is possible to display the grid with the lt View Grid gt key A table then appears showing the channel number the name of the channel the reference wavelength and the alarm thresholds for delta F min P max P and min SNR Alarms When Channel Selection is positioned on Grid it is possible to activate an alarm system This system is based on a system of thresholds Any measurement results that exceed these thresholds are displayed in red in the table and the icon x appears at the top right of the screen If all the results are within the thresholds no result is in red the icon becomes ft A 114 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 7 Optical Spectrum Measurement WDM OSA test configuration To activate the alarm system go to the lt Alarms gt line and select Active Thresholds can then be set using the direction keys or numeric keypad to global level or to the level of each channel 1 lt Global alarms gt Number of channels Yes No Max variation level No or threshold modifiable from 0 1 to 60 dB Max SNR variation No or threshold modifiable from 0 1 to 60 dB Max composite p 3 No or threshold modifiable from 59 9 dBm to 20 dBm lt Channel alarms gt Max channel offset Yes No Min
171. easurement is completed When the measurement is completed the Curve page corresponding to the local Base Unit is automatically displayed Ori gin if the direction of the link has been defined O gt E End if the direc tion of the link has been defined E gt O Select the Summary function using the See Process Curves Summary key to visualize the results in a sumary with the Total Loss amp Total ORL for each wavelength Fig 40 Summary display with OEO traces An additional table can be displayed under the summary with issue high lighted in case of problem Fig 41 Warning on the OEO results Origin and End Bi directional measurement may be performed using up to 4 different traces wavelengths We can therefore analyze successively up to 4 couples of Origin and End traces 98 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 6 Bi directional OTDR OEO Result table In order to go from one couple to another activate the Wavelength Evt key select Wavelength and move from one trace to another using arrows These traces are OTDR traces All regular OTDR functions are proposed to modify the display Zoom Shift Cursors Evt Curve Table Full scale Just like in OTDR mode the user will be able to work on these traces in order to analyze the fiber by moving events consulting the selected trace associated result table asking for an auto measurement adding markers and doing manual measurements See Events page 63 Table o
172. eated a new macro or you wish to modify the name of an existing macro you may edit the name and change it as much as you want 1 Select the macro and select Name on the sub menu 2 Click on gt to open the text editor and type your name 3 Click on Confirm to accept your new name User Manual 780000102 16 The Overwrite Config setting A Replacing a macro Removing a macro Chapter 16 Macros Default macro Both your actions and the actual configuration are saved when you create a new macro So when you play a macro back you have the choice between 1 Playing all actions and keeping the actual configuration Your actions are fairly independent of the configuration and you don t wish to modify the current configuration set Overwrite Config on No 2 Playing all actions and restoring the original configuration Your actions are very dependant of the configuration for example in case you need to do some measurements where you wish to keep all the acquisition parameters the same set Overwrite Config on Yes This setting will also allow to make sure all necessary modules are selected in the SYSTEM page before the macro is started It is strongly recommended to use the second method where all con figuration is restored before playing the macro Only experienced users might decide to do otherwise for different reasons Select an existing macro and click on the soft key Learn A message will be displayed asking
173. eater Coeficient Launch Cadie Start No Launch Cadie End Notes Resuks On Trece A Gra No Una PElsmoma PEgotoowa F Fig 36 OEO test setup menu Acquisition Laser Acquisition will be performed on all selected parameters wavelengths as long as they are available on the remote OTDR as well If not acquisition will be performed on all wavelengths selected and common to both OTDRs Please see the recommendation on page 88 about using the same type of OTDR Mode Bi directional measurement allows manual and Auto modes only Operation is the same as for OTDR measurement 90 User Manual 780000102 16 Measurement parameters A Results Screen parameters Configuration of files parameters Chapter 6 Bi directional OTDR Configuration of bi directional measurement Launch Cable End This option allows the user to declare and describe the launch cables at the OTDR side of the other end of the fiber No No launch cable on Remote OTDR Evt1 2 3 Declaration of a launch cable on the remote OTDR distance given from selected event 1 2 or 3 Results related to this launch cable are eliminated from the table Distance Use the Edit Number key to enter a distance Min 0 Max 1 10 km 32 81 kfeet 6 22 miles or affect the active cursor value pushing the Set Cursor Distance button Default value No 221 Box The 221 box is used in order to link 2 fibers in one single fiber and get simultaneously the talkset and the O
174. ecessary lt Edit gt Displays a sub menu to copy cut paste delete rename or merge one or more files Using the Merge key with the txt files When saving a Manual ORL or LTS measurement result in addition to the LTS and ORL file a txt file is automatically saved for each measure ment type see File Management gt Storing results on page 226 The key Merge is used to merge several txt files from Manual ORL and LTS measurements into one txt file putting together the results of both measurement types Inthe explorer select the txt files generated with the LTS and Manual ORL measurements you want Click on Merge key The file merged_files txtis automatically saved in the same directory as the one where the ORL and LTS txt files have been selected User Manual 780000102 16 263 Chapter 15 File management Explorer Function me NOTE The file merged_files txt can be renamed once it is saved lt Sort gt Opens a sub menu with which the files in the directory can be sorted by name size type or date lt Send by mail gt This option appears if lt Mail gt has been defined with a media in the system setup menu The subject and the recipient of the mail are those set in the file setup menu see File export on page 255 Comments may be added This option allows to send files by e mail After a few seconds a message is displayed to inform the user that the mail has been sent successfully Saving Fi
175. ed to monitor the drift of power wavelength and SNR of optical systems or components This is important to measure the drift of non temperature stabilized transmitter in CWDM networks mes NOTE A Drift measurement can only be done at predefined wavelengths or frequencies for this reason a reference Grid needs to be defined and the Channel Detection parameter is set to Grid The following parameters need to be set for Drift measurements Number of Sweeps defines the number of sweeps 1 to 10 000 Wait Period Defines the time between the measurements Similar to Wait Period of Long Term application see page 110 mee NOTE Wait period specifies the time between start of one measurement and start of the next measurement and includes the instrument measure ment time All channels defined by the channel Grid can be monitored simultane ously with the drift application To show the monitored measurement parameter use the Trace Channel Drift button in the result screen This button has a toggle function with the following selections Trace in Trace mode the up down cursor change the active trace in a multiple trace display Channel in Channel mode the up down cursor change the channel to be displayed over time Drift activates the drift display showing the selected parameter over time User Manual 780000102 16 125 Chapter 7 Optical Spectrum Measurement Drift measurement 126 Activating the Drift di
176. een frame select the function by pressing amp the icon turns orangy yellow In the case a Singlemode Multimode SRL Module is used two icons can be selected on the System Page for singlemode use or for multimode use m sie __ _ ooo Fig 19 Example of SYSTEM Page with OTDR SRL Module Configuring the reflectometry test To call up the test configuration window press the SETUP button Dialog boxes on one and the same screen enable selection of measure ment parameters and display of results and fiber parameters 1 if an OTDR module is installed 46 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Configuring the reflectometry test CQrsck Link Test fasti Locator odes OF Fetrection Scatter Coetictera Launch Cad r Start wo Louna Cathe Ead naa VNA Ro D aa Alarms Ae Notes Ne fesutts Om Trace a Grid Mo Una ia Colors lae Severe S oron Fig 20 OTDR SETUP screen In these windows the parameter selected is in video inverse Select this parameter by means of the direction keys W and A The available choices then appear on the screen they depend on the function selected Make the choice by means of the direction keys lt gt Acquisition You can choose the following acquisition parameters whatever the type parameters of measurement displayed on the trace Those measurement parameters are only linked to the next acquisi AN tion If
177. ence trace s defined all the standard traces are removed and only the new trace acquired is displayed User Manual 780000102 16 81 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements File Management Using the reference trace function in the explorer A trace stored in memory can be set as reference trace before loading one or several standard trace s To open one or several reference trace s 1 Goon the File Explorer 2 Select the trace s to be defined as reference 3 Click on Load and select Reference Yes on the key 4 Click on View Trace s or Load Trace Config The trace s open s and its their number s is are displayed in red I Reference trace Active trace theicon P appears on the upper right hand part of the results table To open standard traces to be added to the reference ones 1 Go back to the explorer 2 Select the trace s to be opened in the same screen as the refer ence traces Aeterence Click on Load and select Reference No on the key Click on View Trace s or Load Trace Config The trace s open s and its their number s is are displayed in black p daear trace active unless it is the active one Standard trace inthis case the number turns green I Reference trace and the trace is displayed in green Standard trace selected File Management Storing OTDR Once the measurements have been made results can be stored on measurements different storage media 82
178. ength nm 850 MM 1300 MM Corning 62 5 1 50140 1 49660 Corning 50 1 48970 1 48560 SpecTran 62 5 1 49600 1 49100 Generic 50 1 49000 1 48600 Generic 62 5 1 49000 1 48700 Fig 23 Predefined index values Multi Mode Scatter coefficient not available in Fault Locator mode User Selects for each wavelength the backscatter coefficient of 99 dB to 50 dB by increments of 0 1dB Modification of the backscatter coefficient K changes the measurements of reflectance and ORL With the CWDM Module the selection is as follows For lasers 1271 1291 1311 1331 and 1351 select the line 1310 SM For lasers 1371 to 1511 select the line 1360 1510 SM For lasers 1531 1551 and 1571 select the line 1550 SM For lasers 1591 and 1611 select the line 1625 SM Auto Backscatter coefficients are selected automatically for each wavelength Predefined The values are automatically set by default Wavelength nm Generic 50 66 3 for 850 MM 73 7 for 1300 MM Generic 62 5 66 1 for 850 MM 70 3 for 1300 MM The default values are given in the paragraph Reflectance on page 3 Launch cable Start Launch cable End NOTE The parameter Launch cable at End is only available in Expert mode No All the results are displayed and referenced on the basis of the board of the plug in User Manual 780000102 16 53 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Configuring the reflectometry test Evt1 2 3 The results relating to
179. environnmentally sound manner Potential methods include reuse of parts or whole products and recycling of products components and or materials Waste Electrical and electronic Equipment WEEE Directive In the European Union this label indicates that this product should not be disposed of with household waste II should be deposited at an appro priate facility to enable recovery and recycling Conventions This guide uses naming conventions and symbols as described in the following tables Table 2 Typographical conventions Description Example User interface actions appear in On the Status bar click Start this typeface Buttons or switches that you Press the ON switch press on a unit appear in this TYPEFACE Code and output messages All results okay appear in this typeface User Manual 780000102 16 xxiii About this guide Conventions Table 2 Typographical conventions Continued Description Text you must type exactly as shown appears in this type face Variables appear in this type face Book references appear in this typeface A vertical bar means or only one option can appear in a sin gle command Square brackets indicate an optional argument Slanted brackets lt gt group required arguments Example Type a set exe in the dia log box Type the new hostname Refer to Newton s Telecom Dictionary platform alble login platform name lt passw
180. er you want in the FILE configuration menu 4 Click on the Store Trace key The FOX files are saved with the extension FOX The LTS files are saved with the extension LTS The ORL files are saved with the extension ORL 226 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 12 OF Module File Management With the LTS and ORL results two files are saved A N The first file is to be used with the Base Unit and allows all LTS mea surements results to be retrieved It is saved with the extension LTS or ORL The second file is an ASCII file using tabulations to separate values It is saved with the extension txt and cannot be opened by the Base Unit It has been designed to be used with a spreadsheet program on a PC where it allows all LTS measurement results to be retrieved and formatted in a customized table For more details on file management see File management page 245 Recalling files To recall a LTS FOX or ORL file Go to the Explorer Select the directory Select the file to load Click on Load a A OO N Click on View Trace s or Load Trace Config The selected file is opened User Manual 780000102 16 227 Chapter 12 OFI Module File Management 228 User Manual 780000102 16 Multi Test Access Unit This chapter describes the function of the MTAU Multi Test Access Unit module and its use The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows Function of the MTAU module on page 230
181. erence page 216 Push the START STOP button once more to start the measurement of the selected fiber The results are displayed as the sequence progresses on both Base Units During the measurement the soft keys on the right of the screen are inactive Once the measurement has finished the Base Unit beeps to signal the end of the sequence The beep differs depending on wether the measurement has completed correctly or according to the measurement alarm status User Manual 780000102 16 221 Chapter 12 OFI Module FOX Function Identifying the Before making a measurement you can check presence of the distant distant module module Once the results page is displayed click on Identify distant The distant module identification is made automatically Distant Module Faro Fig 96 Distant module Identification Data from the distant instrument is displayed The serial number and the operator name on this instrument Check this data before making a measurement or taking a reference Displaying The measurement results are displayed as the sequence progresses on results fora oth Base Units FOX automatic During the measurement the following icon is displayed and the keys on measurement the right of the screen are inactive TINGI Once the measurement has finished the icon turns grey keys are active the Base Unit beeps to signal the end of the measurement 222 User Manual 780000102 16 Send
182. erlaying several traces stored in memory p 41 for overlay of traces The results window obtained by pressing the RESULTS button shows different zones displaying from top to bottom the mini trace in the upper part of the screen accompanied by the principal characteristics of the acquisition and of the file if the result is stored in memory the trace results associated with cursors A and B the trace proper see Trace display functions p 117 the table of results see Table of results p 120 The trace represents power in dBm as a function of frequency in THz or wavelength in nm The channels detected are represented by peaks NOTE If several acquisitions are performed the trace displayed is the one corresponding to the last acquisition Successive zooms on the different channels Zoom on one of the channels as shown previously Press the Trace gt lt Channel key Use the 4 and gt keys to move the zoom on to the successive channels lt Trace gt lt Table gt key This key offers a choice from the following displays Trace alone main display of the trace with a single line of the table at the foot of the page User Manual 780000102 16 117 Chapter 7 Optical Spectrum Measurement Trace display functions Wavelengths and power at point of trace referenced by cursors A and B Trace Table display of trace reduced in size but followed by 5 to 8 lines of the table of res
183. es optical amplifiers and add drop filters resulting in different OSNR for each channel Conventional OSA measurements are unreliable as they indi cate OSNR values that are too high up to 10dB above the true OSNR Using the in band OSNR method I OSNR of OSA 320 will provide the true OSNR value in ROADM based networks 1 In case several DFB lasers are characterized at the same time User Manual 780000102 16 131 Chapter 7 Optical Spectrum Measurement Testing ROADM networks Fig 48 ROADM network test With OSA 320 it is possible to measure the true in band OSNR using the polarization splitting technique Here is a test setup for in band OSNR testing Example OSNR measured with in band OSA 320 at terminal site 1 provides value of 14dB Service failed as the OSNR is lt 20 dB Fig 49 Test setup for In band OSNR testing How to locate the failure Perform the following tests at EDFA monitor access points 2 5 Check per channel input and output power of EDFA gt input power must be in the system specified range Check power uniformity gt Equal power levels for all channels at EDFA output Compare OSNR from EDFA to EDFA 132 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 7 Optical Spectrum Measurement File Management gt OSNR may decrease because of the amplifier noise figure NF type 3 4 dB per EDFA Locate and exchange optical amplifier File Management Storing OSA if Auto st
184. ess START STOP to start a new cycle Ready to make Measure The message is displayed after the completion of a Single mode acqui sition sample or a Reference measurement Either press the SETUP button to return to the Base Unit configuration menu or START STOP User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 8 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement File Management button to start the same acquisition sample This message is also displayed in continued mode if the button START STOP has been used to stop and restart a measurement Waiting bargraph When Statistic mode is used and Long term is set to Period a bargraph displays on the right of the results the remaining time before the next acquisition File Management Storing PMD results Recalling PMD files If you had entered Auto store then the results will be saved automati Cally If not or if you want to store the results under another name directory etc 1 Click on the FILE key 2 Select Setup with the key Setup Explorer 3 Modify the parameters you want 4 Click on Store Trace The PMD traces are stored with the extension PMD Once a PMD file has been stored recall it using the Explorer Select Explorer with the key Setup Explorer Using directions keys select the directory and then the file to open Click on Load A O N Click on View Tace s or Load Trace Config The selected file is opened For further informations on file management see Chapter 1
185. esults screen presents different zones see Example of a AP result Showing profile on page 163 162 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 9 Attenuation profile Display of AP results Trace display Wavelength range es AS E 12 030 fh Sa tee A8 0 000nm 0 0008 a A B Current selected wavelength Profil dB km Fig 64 Example of a AP result Showing profile mee NOTE When several acquisitions are performed the trace resulting from the last acquisition is displayed Spectrum Profile For a reference measurement only the spectrum is available For a AP measurement two different graphs may be visualized The first graph shows the final spectrum see figure Example of a spec trum view after a measurement on page 164 User Manual 780000102 16 163 Chapter 9 Attenuation profile Display of AP results 164 A n Fig 65 Example of a spectrum view after a measurement The second graph the attenuation profile shows the difference between the final spectrum and the reference spectrum of the broadband source see figure Example of a AP result Showing profile on page 163 You may switch from the Profile view to the final Spectrum view using the button Spectrum Profile NOTE The Trace Table and Wavelength functions are available exclu sively with the Profile mode Zoom In order to zoom in on the trace press the Zoom Shift menu key to display Zoom then use the direction ar
186. etween the trace and the two cursors is greyed out and the power is displayed in the form P 4 95dBm Pressing the key Total Power A lt gt B a second time removes the result of the total power measurement Display of gain Tilt delta and gain slope results The Base Unit can display two additional results The gain tilt that is to say the difference between the max and min values of the peaks of the complete signal spectrum between the cursors The gain slope measured by a method using a least squares algo rithm To display these results above the channels Confirm Delta Gain amp Slope in the SETUP menu Place the cursors at the desired position Press the Advanced key then Tilt Slope A lt gt B The gain tilt is displayed in dB Gain slope is traced and its value is displayed in dB THz or dB nm according to the units selected User Manual 780000102 16 119 Chapter 7 Optical Spectrum Measurement Table of results SDI he ama f iiti A VV VV Ga Oe ive Fig 44 Display of total power gain tilt and slope of the gain between the cursors Table of results 120 Lines According to the choice made in the SETUP menu the table of results may include either a line for each channel detected if Channel Selection Permanent ora line for each graduation if Channel Selection Grid and a grid is selected Type of display The table may be displayed in a single line on
187. ever theless launching each measurement remains the user responsibility as some extra equipment might be needed ex broadband source for PMD Select Auto on the key Manual Auto to switch to auto mode or vice et versa funtion Corner __ _ HASHS 5 Icons representing available functions 1 Links showing lt _ m e that OTDR will A be performed on port A PMD and AP on port C Fig 103 Auto mode for the MTAU plug in Different icons appear at the top of the screen showing different avail able functions According to your Base Unit configuration you may have all the following functions available OTDR PMD CD AP OSA 232 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 13 Multi Test Access Unit Auto mode Configuration 1 Make sure you select all necessary functions in the SETUP menu of the sequence of tests mus NOTE Icons for selected functions appear in yellow icons for available but unselected functions appear in grey 2 Go to each tab if necessary to make sure all setup values are correct for each selected function 3 Select the Function Cursor key and choose which function you wish to configure in the list of icons 4 Select the Port Cursor key and choose which port is connected to the corresponding function 5 Click on the key to validate the association A solid link will be drawn between the function and the port you selected see the figu 6 Go w NOTE
188. expected PMD value PMD test setup menu 136 After connecting the fiber to be tested and all the equipment is switched on and ready for use you will then need to set up the Base Unit to perform a PMD measurement To access the PMD test setup menu press the SETUP button on the Base Unit The different measurement parameters are displayed 1 81XXX plug ins offer an integrated polarizer therefore don t require an OVP 15 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 8 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement PMD test setup menu You may either choose the default values by pressing the Test Auto key either define your own configuration Test Auto In Test Auto configuration the setups below are provided Configuration Setup menu ACQUISITION Sweep Single Averaging acquisition Auto Make reference No Reference date Long term No MEASURES Coupling Strong File Menu Filenaming Auto Cable_lId Fiber_Num Direction Autostore Yes Fiber Nbr Increment Yes Manual Mode in manual mode you can set your own parameters Configuration i I ay Acan Serep Auvereging acquisition Auto Make Reterence Ves Known Length Fiber Length Distance Un f Ro PJtanderd f at pert f Aarms Aative Spectral Uat he Fig 50 PMD Test setup menu Expert Mode 1 Does not concern 81XXX plug ins User Manual 780000102 16 137 Chapter 8 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement PMD test
189. f results page 64 Automatic measurement and detection page 70 Addition of markers page 71 and Manual measurements page 72 have been done on either the Origin curve or on the End curve are When the user comes back to OEO trace all modifications that can A N now taken in account The OEO measurement is performed again OEO trace Only one couple of OE and EO traces is displayed corresponding to one wavelength If the measurement has been performed on different wavelengths select Wavelength on the key Wavelength Evt in order to go from one couple of traces to another using arrows Functions such as Zoom Shift Cursors Evt Curve Table Full scale are all the same as for OTDR but the table result as well as the use of markers are specific to OEO measurements OEO Result table Bi directional measurement results use principles described in Principle of bi directional measurement page 4 The total loss of the fiber on the line specifying the total number of events is resulting from the average between the total loss calculated in the direction O gt E and the total loss calculated in the other direction Three tables are available in the OEO curve page each showing atten uation slope and reflectance In order to go from one table to another use the Advanced key followed by the Loss Slope Reflect key and select one of the three possibilities User Manual 780000102 16 99 Chapter 6 Bi directional OTDR Automatic
190. f the screen the file signature selected is repeated see Example of signature of an OTDR file in the File Menu on page 247 256 User Manual 780000102 16 Storage media Storage media built into the Base Unit External USB storage media Chapter 15 File management Explorer Function Cinrs sooo ed R Danes GB Bere Curves B DOOM Moarre S Gare 8 Gwe 8 Gites B Tes 8 Ocon ha CA RAL mour 1 3800 mi iar roo anges 114240 Free space available on the selected media ot piore f elini bip Fig 126 Example of explorer For saving or recalling data the Base Unit offers a wide choice of media both built in and external Free space on selected media is clearly displayed at the bottom of the left panel An internal memory A hard disk or high capacity storage on option If this option is selected then the hard disk replaces the internal memory A3 1 2 in floppy disk drive on option 8000 platform only A CD RW drive on option 8000 platform only The Base Unit is equipped with 2 USB ports as standard One of these can be used to connect an external storage medium in particular a USB memory stick NOTE Although two USB ports are present it is not possible to use simulta neously more than one external USB storage medium High capacity USB stick such as 2Go or higher are not recom mended User Manual 780000102 16 257 Chapter 15
191. f the selected software s or Click on Confirm All Choices to upgrade all versions NOTE The software versions list does not always appear cf previous ver sions as well as the Show Previous Next Choice buttons and the Confirm Continue key In this case the upgrading starts automati Cally Upgrading begins The Base Unit is automatically rebooted Upgrading takes several minutes At the end the Base Unit is auto matically restarted if the boot version is superior to version 01 16 Updating from a CD ROM can be done directly if the Base Unit is equipped with a CD ROM drive 1 2 Connect the Base Unit into mains with the AC plug and switch it on Insert the CD ROM in the drive of the Base Unit Press the SYSTEM key and then in succession the keys Expert Tools gt Software Upgrade gt Copy from CD The message Insert the CD in the drive is displayed Click on Confirm The list of the software versions available on the PC is displayed next to the versions installed on the Base Unit Click on Show Previous choice or Show Next Choice to display the previous and next versions available Click on Confirm this Choice to start the upgrade of the selected software s or Click on Confirm All Choices to upgrade all versions User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 2 Getting started Installing a new version of the software mee NOTE The software versions list does not always appear cf previous ver sions as we
192. ference Remote operator 1 Remove the protection cap on the OBS 55 and then connect the connector to the fiber link under test 2 Press the ON OFF button to switch on the OBS 55 broadband source Keep pressure on the ON OFF button until the gt 2s PERM LED lights up The CW LED lights up while the green 1550 nm LED will flash for a few seconds before being steadily lighted User Manual 780000102 16 141 Chapter 8 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement Performing a PMD measurement with a 5073XXX plug in or OSA XXX series module Local operator 1 Remove the dust cap from the Signal Input optical socket situated on the rear panel of the Base Unit to connect the fiber link you have connected to the OBS 55 via the two jumpers and coupler as shown in the below diagram Fiber under test Coupler me OT Jumper l Jumpers OBS 55 example Signal input socket situated on the OSA module Fig 51 Reference measurement 2 Select the PMD function in the Instrument Setup menu To do this press the SETUP button then select the PMD function and press the key amp Fig 52 Selection of the PMD function 8000 series example 3 Press the button RESULTS to display the auto calibration status A bargraph informs of the progression state of the calibration at the bottom of the screen Wait for the calibration to be fully completed before continuing 4 Press the button SETUP to access to t
193. ference by the other using specific softkeys Load Ref From Trace the reference which has been used for the curve actually open will be used for the next acquisitions Update Trace With Ref apply the acquisition reference parameters to the load open curve Performing a Chromatic Dispersion Measurement Once the reference measurement is correctly performed 1 Connect the source and the ODM module at each end of the fiber under test 2 Press the SETUP button to access the CD configuration menu User Manual 780000102 16 197 Chapter 11 CD measurements using phase shift method Performing a CD measurement through amplifiers 3 Select the appropriate CD test setup according to your application as earlier defined in Configuring the CD test on page 190 4 Press the START STOP button to perform CD measurement A bargraph as this one mememe is displayed until the end of the acquisition O Fiber under test Jumper Jumper Signal input socket on the ODM plug in Fig 81 Connections for the CD Measurement using phase shift method me NOTE You may modify the fiber length at any time without performing a mea surement again The CD result per kilometer will be recalculated auto matically Performing a CD measurement through amplifiers Once the reference measurement is correctly performed 1 Connect the source and the ODM module at each end of the fiber unde
194. fiber under test It is preferable to use the same type of connector at both ends of the fiber being tested to ensure the same connection conditions for measuring P1 and P2 Accuracy of measurements A high degree of accuracy is often required It is then necessary to perform a preliminary calibration without the fiber under test to elim inate the losses due to connections as far as this is possible To do this use the Reference Value function User Manual 780000102 16 207 Chapter 12 OFI Module LTS function For measurements in the laboratory where both ends of the fiber are on the same site the repeatability of attenuation measurements is better than 0 1 dB For measurements in the field where the two ends are on different sites variations from one measurement to another are of the order of 0 2 dB using a relative measurement Connections to the power meter and the source FOX connector Power meter connector Fig 86 Optical connectors The type of optical connector used for the power meter is UPP Universal Push Pull which is compatible with all diameter 2 5 mm connectors FC SC ST DIN E2000 etc mes NOTE The source connection is the same as the FOX port Configuring the To activate the function LTS Press the SYSTEM button EA Use the direction keys to select the LTS icon framed in green and press the confirmation key amp the icon in the frame will turn yellow The effect
195. fications of WDM plug ins 292 Dimensions and weight of WDM plug ins 293 PMD plug ins i roS enine a ae a ae iaa 293 CD OTDR plug ins 2 eee eee eee eee 294 ODM plug ins 00 2c 296 ODM MR plug ins 00 cece eee eee 297 Information on fiber plug ins 5020TF and 82LFSM2 B2LFS MA TREN e a eer ee a aata aa 298 5020TF plug in vex wake ns nuana n arrra nrun 298 82LFSM2 82LFSM4 plug ins 299 MTAU plug in poreo op techni ea te 300 BBS plug ins soise kandi ened a ee 300 OFI plug INS 22 ee Sb a arse ia ai aa ates 301 Standalone power meter 200200000 es 302 Warning zc beti cies eco Se cee ee en oe ete ele 302 Chapter 19 Options and accessories 303 References of measurement plug ins 304 OTDR Modules 00000 cece eee 304 References of CWDM plug ins 2 306 WDM PMD Modules 0 0000000 e eee 306 GD Modules es vice sce Mon tek snk ee Sas A 307 ODM Module 00 0000 e eee eee 307 ODM MR Module 000 0c eee eee 307 MTAU Modules 0 0000 cece eee eee 308 OFI Modules 05 5 e e ph Be fe Bee E E A ee ke 308 BBS MOdUuIeS 5 c ci 5 Sadeds Med ane tones Seas ea gona 308 Application Softwares 0 0 00 eee 308 Printefie fu ferire nes teat ede ee aS se ees oe Feet 308 Launch Fiber Modules 02200000 eee 309 User manual references
196. figuration of the desired application e g OTDR OSA etc See Tabs on page 33 246 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 15 File management File configuration menu File signature The acquisition parameters of the trace contained in the selected file are displayed at the top of the screen together with a small scale represen tation of the trace provided it was acquired on a MTS T BERD Base Unit see Mini trace on page 33 Fiber number Pulse Color code width Laser Refraction index Name of the file tgilonm l0ns 72 Nea HD _7210n3_1310_10n5 SomCO Gacm 1003 IOR 1 46500 1 BI kkkkk O E a LES Extremity info Date of the acquisition Direction of of the signal measurement Fig 118 Example of signature of an OTDR file in the File Menu File information Current directory The Dir line of the menu shows the directory in which the traces will be stored This line can also be used to change the active storage medium direc tory To do this launch the directory editor by means of the key gt The directory edited must exist otherwise it will not be taken Fares into account Change of medium and the creation and or dele Paisa tion of directories can only be done through the file explorer or link manager see Explorer Function on page 256 or Link Manager Function on page 266 but not necessarily in the FILE menu The FILE menu is used to edit parameters for the current or next acquisiti
197. fined in kilofeet Miles Distance unit defined in miles User Manual 780000102 16 139 Chapter 8 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement PMD test setup menu Results Screen 140 parameters Coupling Strong Weak For classical long single mode fibers For polarization maintained fibers and components A weak coupling includes three peaks for a Fast Fourier Transform Method FFT If the softkey PMD is set to Standard mode any measurement will be set to the strong mode Coupling and the wavelength range to Auto The Expert mode is to be used with measurement through EDFA When selected the Expert mode allows to set the wavelength range Measurement Band Auto C Band L Band C L Band Manual When Manual is selected the Measurement Start and End must be set in nm In manual mode the user will have to define the starting value of measurement and the ending value in nm Alarms None Active Auto Values No Yes Bit rate info None selected Selecting this option removes access to the Auto Values and Bit rate info options they will disappear from the screen To include any survey alarms The following fields are then enabled Threshold values are entered manually Threshold values are automatically calculated and adjusted in accordance with the selected information from the Bit rate info table This option gives access to the lines PMD Delay and PMD Coeff A table to the right of thi
198. function on page 190 Configuring the CD test on page 190 Performing a Reference measurement on page 194 Performing a Chromatic Dispersion Measurement on page 197 Display of CD results on page 199 File Management on page 202 CD standards and limits on page 203 User Manual 780000102 16 189 Chapter 11 CD measurements using phase shift method Selection of the CD function Selection of the CD function You must select the CD function from the ODM Module To do this press the SYSTEM button The ODM plug in provides more than one function Select the CD icon using the direction keys and gt the icon is framed in green Select the function by pressing amp the icon turns yellow _ Fig 74 Selection of the CD function A bargraph tuning informs of the progression state of the calibration at the bottom of the screen Wait for the calibration to be fully completed before continuing Configuring the CD test To configure a chromatic dispersion measurement on a fiber press the SETUP button The different measurement parameters will be displayed You have two choices press the Test Auto to obtain the default config uration or define your own configuration Parameters chosen by automatic configuration Known Length No Approximation formula Sellmeier 5T if the ODM module is used with a BBS2A on the OESCL band Sellmeier 3T when the ODM modules are operating on the SCL bands Au
199. g on page 272 Default macro on page 275 Macro playback on page 276 Storing a macro on page 277 User Manual 780000102 16 271 Chapter 16 Macros Calling the Macro function Calling the Macro function This function is accessible via the button SCRIPT in the front of the Base Unit 10 various macros may be created and used Once you click on the button SCRIPT you see the list of all the 10 macro positions Each number from 1 to 10 displays the name of the macro stored at that position or displays Empty in case that particular spot is free Mg Default Macro Macro 2 Macro 39 Macro 22 Macro 49 Macro 1 Empty Empty Empty Empty Empty Empty eoeesenovsawen Fig 132 List of Macros Macro recording The Base Unit offers two different types of macro Standard and File For both types it is required to Select and activate all necessary modules before starting the macro recording f Never press the SYSTEM key during macro recording Standard macro This macro type shall be used to automate functions or operation mode To create a new standard macro 272 User Manual 780000102 16 File macro Chapter 16 Macros Macro recording 1 Select a free position A sub menu automatically appears 2 Change the Macro type if necessary to set it on Standard 3 Click on the soft key Learn You arrive directly to the Results page You can now se
200. g types of events 0 0 00 67 Table motes se a a ae a tee Son hea he ee sowie ee 68 Automatic measurement and detection 70 Addition of markers 0 000 cece eee eee 71 Representation of the markers 0 0000 71 Hints on the positioning of markers 72 Deleting markers 20000 0c e eee eee ees 72 Manual measurements 20000e seer eee eeee 72 Measurements of slope 2022000 cereus 73 Result of slope measurement 0000 00 ee 73 Deleting a slope measurement 05 74 Performing splice and reflectance measurements 74 Two points method 00 0000 eee eee 74 Five points method 0000 cece eee eee 75 Manual measurement of ORL 00200 a ee 75 ORL on a saturated trace 0 eee eee 76 Memorization of the position of events 76 Fault Locator Mode 00 0 c eee ee eee eens 77 Function eere ces ele cate 6 ea ae eb eg ace hab aoe dies 77 Choosing the function 0 e eee eee 77 Test configuration 2 0 0 cee ee 78 Starting the test nc eneri kee eee eee ease 79 Reference Trace function 00eeee eee eeee 80 Using the reference trace function in the Result page 81 Using the reference trace function in the explorer 82 File Management 00 22 e cece e ee eee eens 82 Storing OTDR measurements
201. ge 176 together with the infor markers ation specific to the positioning of the markers The OTDR traces displayed in a window and showing markers 178 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 10 CD measurements using pulse delay method Making a chromatic dispersion measurement The distance with respect to the origin of each marker for each trace The difference of each marker from the reference marker The OTDR mini trace to the left of the bar Specific keys with which the markers can be modified To position a marker Select the trace on which you wish to position the marker by pressing the Select Lambda key repeatedly until its wavelength is displayed in the bar To position the marker automatically at the summit of the reflec tive event of the active trace press the key Auto Marker To position the marker manually place the active cursor at the desired position then press Manual Marker Functions available lt Lambda gt Activates one of the 4 traces the wavelength of the active trace is shown at the top left of the screen lt Zoom Shift gt To shift the trace horizontally or vertically press this key to show lt Shift gt then use the keys lt and gt until the desired shift is obtained lt Cursor A Cursor B gt To displace cursor A and or B press the key to show lt Cursor A Cursor B gt then use the keys 4 and gt The wavelengths on which the cursors are positioned are displ
202. ge opens explaining the process 4 Follow the instructions to download the exe or jds file and update the Base Unit NOTE The jds file must be downloaded if you cannot load the exe file Once donwloaded on your PC the extension jds must be changed to EXe User Manual 780000102 16 21 Chapter 2 Getting started Installing a new version of the software Installation from a PC Installation from NOTE Once the upgrade has been loaded from Internet the new version cannot be burned with the CD ROM of the MTS T BERD Base Unit Burn the CD ROM of the PC using CD burner softwares recom mended by JDSU The new versions can be installed according 2 methods from the harddisk of a PC from the CD ROM drive of a PC Connect the MTS T BERD Base Unit into mains with the AC plug the harddisk of a and switch it on PC 2 Connect the MTS T BERD Base Unit to the PC by an Ethernet link mes NOTE 22 Use a cross over if the Base Unit is directly connected to the PC ora direct cable if the Base Unit is connected to the LAN 3 On the PC download and save the exe upgrade from the web www jdsu com 4 Once the transfer is completed and in order to perform the upgrade the exe file shall be extracted under a root of the PC The files extracted shall be placed under C or under a drive created with the following process a Put the release under a directory such as C 8000_Base_Upgrade b Opena DO
203. guration menu for Spectrum analysis Use the keys A and W to move the cursor to the different parameters and the keys 4 and gt to modify a value Performing the itis recommended before performing an AP measurement at least once reference 2 day to carry out a reference measurement of the broadband source To make a reference connect your OBS 55 or BBS to your Base Unit just like shown on figure below i Jumper Coupler Jumper Signal input socket situated on the ODM module Fig 62 Reference measurement 1 Check that the option Make Reference is set to Yes in the configu ration menu Ges NOTE When a reference is performed acquisition parameters are not taken in account 2 Press the button START STOP to start the reference of the broad band source To display the results press the button RESULTS Once the reference is correct AP measurement may take place 160 User Manual 780000102 16 Fig 63 Chapter 9 Attenuation profile Performing a AP measurement Example of a reference for a broadband source A bargraph shows if the source power level will allow to perform AP measurements correctly Weak Strong If the reference measurement does not provide a correct result check the following points Error message Possible problem Possible solution Acquisition impossible Hit any key to continue Signal level too low Check source and con nections Hit any key to continue
204. he Base Unit configuration menu for PMD Use the keys A and W to move the cursor to the different parameters and the keys lt and to modify a value 142 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 8 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement Performing a PMD measurement with a 5073XXX plug in or OSA XXX series module 5 Check that the option Make Reference is set to Yes in the configu ration menu mee NOTE When a reference is performed acquisition parameters are not taken in account except for those concerning averaging 6 Press the button START STOP to start the reference of the broad band source To display the results press the button RESULTS Once the reference is correct PMD measurement may take place Fig 53 Example of a correct reference for a broadband source A bargraph shows if the source power level will allow to perform PMD measurements correctly Weak Swe i Strong If the reference measurement does not provide a correct result check the following points Error message Possible problem Possible solution Acquisition impossible Auto calibration is not Wait for the calibration to be terminated Hit any key to continue completed User Manual 780000102 16 143 Chapter 8 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement Performing a PMD measurement with a 5073XXxX plug in or OSA XXX series module Error message Possible problem Possible solution Signal level too low Check source and
205. he dead zone at the beginning of the fiber measurement of slope after the marker stops just before the next marker or at the end of the fiber Do not add markers with the Add Marker key after a manual measurement as all the results will be recalculated automatically by the instrument If two markers are too close together they will appear on the trace and the table but no measurement will be carried out on the second marker to obtain results for this marker a manual measurement is necessary If you press the Add Marker key when the cursor is very close to a marker the latter will be deleted To delete a marker move the cursor on to the marker and press the Add Marker key The marker selected will be deleted and a complete measurement without this marker will be carried out To delete several markers use the Event key to move from one marker to the other then press the Add Marker key as many times as neces sary The cursor will be automatically moved on to the successive markers Deletion of markers can cause incorrect measurement results Manual measurements 72 Manual Measurements are only available in Expert Mode As soon as you have made an acquisition with or without automatic measurement you can make manual measurements on any event on the trace by means of the cursors A and B in association with the func tions of slope detection of splice and calculation of ORL The manual measurements ar
206. he duration of acquisition between 25 seconds and 10 minutes User Manual 780000102 16 169 Chapter 10 CD measurements using pulse delay method Configuring the CD test If the acquisition is performed on a single wavelength this is the acquisi tion time for that wavelength If the acquisition is performed on all 4 wavelengths it is the total acquisi tion time for all the wavelengths bearing in mind that 1 5 of this time is dedicated to acquisitions on wavelengths 1480 1550 1625 nm 2 5 of this timed is dedicated to acquisition on 1310 nm as this demands a higher number of averagings If the acquisition is done in auto mode the time shown does not take into account the time of detection of fiber ends 30 seconds Parameters of Ref wavelength analysis Choose one of the 4 wavelengths the result of the measurement for this wavelength will be the reference for calculation of delays obtained for the other wavelengths Index of Refraction Choose the group index N of the fiber from values lying between 1 30000 and 1 70000 mee NOTE This index value is unique and is not attached to a wavelength It is used for all acquisitions carried out on the CD tab and is saved with the trace me NOTE It is advisable to use the index at 1550 nm to obtain a correct end of fiber measurement Measurement zone Select the method of measurement of chromatic dispersion Link Measurement of the whole link from
207. he fiber under test the validation symbol is displayed and the process proceeds to Step 3 Otherwise the red cross x is dis played and the measurement is stopped Step 3 The master Base Unit performs the acquisition using the first wave length in the list The acquisition time selected on the Setup screen is displayed on each Base Unit either in the Local column or the Remote column depending on which Base Unit is considered When the measurement is terminated the message lt Completed gt is displayed The trace is transferred to the other Base Unit Step 4 The slave Base Unit performs the acquisition using the same wave length The message acquisition time selected on the Setup screen is displayed on each Base Unit either in the Local column or the Remote column according to which Base Unit is considered The message lt Completed gt is displayed when the measurement is termi nated The trace is transferred to the master Base Unit Step 5 The bi directional measurement is completed NOTE The message lt Impossible measurement gt is displayed if the measure ment has not been able to detect the end of the fiber on any of the two traces The measurement must be performed once more with new acquisition parameters or by placing markers manually on the mea surement Step 6 Step 3 Step 4 and Step 5 are performed for each wavelength to test IMPORTANT It is possible to stop the measurement at any step of
208. hoice is made at link level as all the fibers of a given link for a given extremity will be coded the same way This choice modifies the result 780000102 16 Cable content lt Fiber gt Chapter 15 File management File configuration menu of the lt Fiber Code gt line See Fiber Nbr Increment on page 250 Shows how the color code is to be used see figure Cable structure menu on page 252 Only the color code of the fiber is proposed example Gold lt Ribbon Fiber gt The color code of the fiber is preceded by that of the ribbon and separated by a example BI Or lt Tube Fiber gt The color code of the fiber is preceded by that of the tube and separated by a example Br Or lt Tube Ribbon Fiber gt Max tube Max ribbon Max fiber mes NOTE The color code of the fiber is preceded by that of the tube then by that of the ribbon the three being separated by a example Br Bl Or See Fiber Nbr Increment on page 250 Shows the maximum number of tubes in the cable for the extremity selected This information influences the automatic coding of the fiber See Fiber Nbr Increment on page 250 Shows the maximum number of ribbons in the cable for the extremity selected This information influences the automatic coding of the fiber See Fiber Nbr Increment on page 250 Shows the maximum number of fibers in the cable for the ext
209. ibe ing irecti concerning local concerning remote Fig 37 Process page display with two T BERD 8000 If a 221 box is used the upper part of the process page is represented as show below Representation of the 221 Box D g 8126 VSRE 1310 1550 1 Operator 20 25km 7 1 i LOCAL i REMOTE oeo otot MTS6000 mi6 i MTS 6000 wis 1 8126 VSRE 1310 1550 Fiber status Fig 38 Process page display with a 221 box with two MTS 6000 In this case the color of the fiber represented on the information zone changes according to the connection status Grey the connection is in progress Green the connection has been correctly established Red the connection has failed 94 User Manual 780000102 16 Fiber link check Measurement process Chapter 6 Bi directional OTDR Performing a bi directional measurement To ensure that the two units are connected to the same fiber under test select Check same fiber If the fiber is the same at both extremities a at symbol will be displayed on the measurement status zone Fiber measurement Step 1 Choose to use the markers stored in memory or not by selecting Lock Evt or Free Evts NOTE If the markers events are already defined for the link you may select the Lock Evt key This implies that the unit will now perform measure ments with those markers Otherwise select Free Evts Press START to begin the measurement The line Check if same set
210. iber N Fiber N 1 Color Code Yes No Yes No lt Fiber Name gt Fiberx24 Fiberx24 Fiberx25 Fiberx25 lt Fiber Code gt BI Aq 1 24 Gold BI 2 1 Fig 120 Example of incrementation of fiber code Link The information entered in the Link Description window concerns the description Extremities are different Cable Id editing and or the modifications of the cable and fiber parameters When a trace is recalled without recall of the configuration the parameters of this trace will be present only in its signature In some cases it is interesting to save different information for the origin and the extremity of the cable If this option is validated it is possible after selecting the extremity to be edited in the Cable Structure menu to modify the values specific to the cable cable name color coding content of the coding for each of these extremities See chapter Cable structure on page 252 To display modify the data specific to the fiber name and code it is necessary to change direction temporarily In the O gt E direction the information on the origin can be edited and in the E gt O direction that on the extremity This parameter allows to enter an identification of the cable using the Edition menu This parameter is available if the previous one Extremities are different is set to No User Manual 780000102 16 251 Chapter 15 File management File configuration menu 252 Direction Origin End Locat
211. if the 1 Attention all modification of these parameters has immediate repercussions on the trace and entails the loss of the measurement statistics 110 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 7 Optical Spectrum Measurement WDM OSA test configuration option selected for the grid is Without or Conventional Permanent Automatic detection of the channel on each acquisition In this mode the channels are always detected without making a reference measurement NOTE At the end of an acquisition in permanent mode it is possible to cre ate a grid on the basis of the channels detected To do this press the key Create Grid in the SETUP menu Signal threshold Threshold of detection of channels see Channel detection threshold p 118 Auto the threshold is determined automatically Manual from 79 9 to 10 dBm Use direction keys or Edit Number to modify values Min 80 dBm Max 10 0 dBm NOTE Modification of the parameters Channel selection and Signal threshold will only modify the results if the WDM module present is the one that was used for the acquisition Min Channel spacing only available in OSA xxx Defines the minimum spacing of two adjacent optical channels in the system This parameter is also used to set the range for integration to measure the accurate total signal power of an optical channel see table contents page 120 The window for channel power integration will be 1 2 the min channel
212. ific section 8 38008 a P n Fig 73 CD measurement on a section User Manual 780000102 16 183 Chapter 10 CD measurements using pulse delay method File Management CD measurement on a section using stored traces A The key RAZ Section orig allows to reset to zero the origin of the section The key Copy Section orig allows to copy the origin of the section The process to measure the CD results of a section located between 2 events X and Y is as follows Load the trace containing the CD results up to the Y event by pressing Load followed by View Trace in the file menu Select in the CD SETUP menu Measure area Section Load the trace having the CD results up to the X event by pressing Load followed by Load Measure Ref in the File menu When storing the trace all those parameters will be taken into account and stored If the link is too long to make a CD measurement from one single extremity a bidirectional measurement can be done To do so the fibre must have specific elements for example reflective events or Fresnels such as the connectors measurable from the link extremities Measure uses two acquisitions which must be realised with the same CD module File Management Storing CD If you had entered Auto store then the results will be saved automati measurements 2lly 184 If not or if you want to store the results under another name directory et
213. ing a mes sage Chapter 12 OFI Module FOX Function Fig 97 Result of a FOX automatic measurement The data displayed in the table can vary according to the acquisiton parameters see Configuration of the FOX automatic measurement page 214 When two Base Units are connected at each end of the fiber via their FOX port they can send messages to each other Two types of messages are available predefined messages 10 User definable messages 4 The message sent by one Base Unit will be displayed on the screen of the other Base Unit To send a message to the distant Base Unit In the Results page push the Send Message key Fig 98 Messages that can be sent to the distant Base Unit User Manual 780000102 16 223 Chapter 12 OFI Module Manual ORL A menu with the 14 messages available is displayed Select the message to be sent using the direction keys amp and w To enter a user message select one of the last 4 messages called User message 1 2 3 4 and push the direction key The edition keypad is displayed Enter the text you want and push the Valid key on the keypad or on the screen Push the Send Message or Select key On the distant Base Unit the message is displayed with the icon Press any key to delete the message NOTE If the link is not established between the two Base Unit the following error message is displayed No acknowledge received for the SMS sent
214. ing agreement Assumptions This guide is intended for novice intermediate and experienced users who want to use the MTS T BERD effectively and efficiently We are assuming that you are familiar with basic telecommunication concepts and terminology Technical assistance If you need assistance or have questions related to the use of this product call or e mail JDSU s Technical Assistance Center for customer support Table 1 Technical assistance centers Region Phone Number Americas 866 228 3762 tac jdsu com Telecom Products World Wide 301 353 1550 Europe Africa and 49 0 7121 86 1345 hotline europe jdsu com Mid East Europe 33 0 1 30 81 50 60 support france jdsu com JDSU France Asia and the Pacific 852 2892 0990 Southeast Asia Aus Hong Kong tralia and New 86 10 6833 7477 Zealand Beijing China All others 866 228 3762 tac jdsu com xxii User Manual 780000102 16 About this guide Recycling Information During off hours you can request assistance by doing one of the following leave a voice mail message at the Technical Assistance number in your region e mail North American Technical Assistance Center tac jdsu com or European Technical Assistance Center support uk jdsu com submit your question using our online Technical Assistance Request form at www jdsu com Recycling Information ped JDSU recommends that customers dispose of their instruments and peripherals in an
215. ing the direction keys first choose the wavelength then press the gt key to access choice of the value XXX XX then confirm this value with the validation key This reference is also automatically available in the Results page using the Set as Reference key Attenuator compensation Choice of level User Manual 780000102 16 to be applied to the wavelength chosen for measurement to compensate for the loss due to the external attenuator XX XX dB First use the direction keys to choose the wavelength then press gt to access choice of value then confirm this value by pressing the validation key 209 Chapter 12 OFI Module LTS function mus NOTE To copy a Reference Level or a Attenuator Compensator on all wave lengths select the reference wavelength and click on Update for All Wavel Configuring the Alarm Activation of the Alarm function any result below alarm parameters the lower threshold or above the upper threshold of the power meter will be displayed in red on the Results page Lower and upper thresholds Choice of lower and upper thresholds for each available wavelength from 60 to 40 dBm selected with the direction keys mes NOTE To copy one value of the Lower or and Upper threshold for all wave lengths select the reference value and click Update for All Wavel mes NOTE A continuous push on the direction keys increments the value by 10 dBm Configuring and displaying the parameter
216. ion Cable structure The direction shows if the acquisition has been made from the origin to the extremity O gt E or from the extremity to the origin E gt O Changing direction makes it possible when different extremities are handled to see the parameters of the fiber for the other extremity The name of the origin of the link may be entered here The name of the extremity of the link may be entered here This line opens a sub menu all the parameters of which can be different for each extremity li uctu Color Coding Cable Content Tube Ribbon Fiber Max Tube TubefFiber er Max Ribbon Max Fiber Tube Coding Ribbon Coding TIA Fiber Coding TA Code Definition gt Fig 121 Cable structure menu NOTE The Cable Structure window is specific to an extremity Each struc ture keeps its own parameters by default Modifications made to the one are not automatically applied to the other Thus after the values relating to the origin have been modified it is normal not to find these same values entered for the extremity View extremity If extremities are declared as different see Cable Id Color Coding User Manual Extremities are different on page 251 this parameter allows to navigate between the Extremity and Origin parameters If the extremities are different you can specify the cable identification for the origin and the extremity Choice of whether or not to apply a color coding to the fiber This c
217. ion of the state of the connection in real time an automatic mode which enables quick starting of an acquisition followed by automatic measurement a manual mode in which the acquisition parameters can be config ured as a function of the fiber to be tested The acquisition is followed by automatic measurement User Manual 780000102 16 55 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Acquisition A Real time mode 56 a Fault Locator Mode which enable to detect the distance of the end of fiber from its origin and consequently to detect a possible break of the fiber see Fault Locator Mode on page 77 The mode of acquisition is selected after pressing the SETUP button on the Acquisition gt Mode line see Acquisition parameters on page 47 In the case of the multiple wavelength modules the acquisition will be started on the different wavelengths successively if the option All is selected on the Acquisition gt Laser line There will be no automatic detection if the acquisition has been aborted early Battery saver When running on battery if no acquisition has been performed for two minutes the power supply of the module is cut off to save the battery Traffic detection Traffic on the fiber under test is automatically detected and reported If the fiber connected to the OTDR module is active a message indi cating a signal in the fiber under test is displayed Press the START STOP key to begi
218. is suspended by a pause event waiting for the user to restart the process see Inserting a pause page 274 All actions recorded in your macro are now performed The speed of the playback is not the same as the speed of the record ing All actions except for acquisitions will appear faster but will remain slow enough to let you see what is currently performed Acquisition times remain the same as during the recording 276 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 16 Macros Storing a macro mee NOTE Don t forget to add interactive events during your macro recording if you need a pause a specific message or simply to be able to abort the macro at a certain stage if necessary Touching a button on the Base Unit will automatically cause the macro playback to abort except for restarting the playback interrupted by a pause event gt NOTE For a File macro you may select several files before you call the Macro function Script specific option According the configuration of the MTS T BERD 8000 this one can be equipped with a Script function available on the same page as the macro page To use the script a MTAU module is mandatory see Use of the script specific client option on page 235 Storing a macro The Base Unit lets you save macros as files on the hard disk or other storage media To store a macro select it and click on the soft key Store It will automat ically store it in the curre
219. ispersion on an optical link A N using the OTDR method of the Base Unit it is necessary to have a reflective element such as a connector at the end of the fiber If the end of fiber is detected but no reflective event is seen during the phase of positioning of the markers then a 0 dB termination connector should be placed at the end of the fiber this connector is supplied as an User Manual 780000102 16 173 Chapter 10 CD measurements using pulse delay method Making a chromatic dispersion measurement CD acquisition mode Automatic acquisition mode Manual acquisition mode 174 accessory with the CD module It increases the end of fiber Fresnel peak amplitude and thus enables the measurement The limit of automatic detection is about 24 dB for the attenuation of the link 120 km at 0 2 dB km at 1550 nm In manual mode it is about 30 dB Measurements of chromatic dispersion are generally made with 4 markers at 1310 1480 1550 and 1625 nm However if only three markers can be positioned the measurement can still be made though with reduced accuracy In this case the message Measurement 3 lambdas is displayed To optimize the measurements it is advisable not to place the markers on saturated Fresnels If this happens a message appears It is then advisable to add an on line attenuator The measurement of chromatic dispersion can use two modes of acqui sition automatic and manual To make a CD measureme
220. isplayed i Once the two references are complete the date as well as the type Measurement Before making an automatic FOX measurement check that acquisition both Base Units local and distant as well as the OFI module on each instrument are powered on and the FOX function selected 220 User Manual 780000102 16 Choosing the fiber to be tested Making the measurement Chapter 12 OFI Module FOX Function the FOX function is correctly configured SETUP menu each end of the fiber is correctly connected to the module the fiber and jumpers are in good condition To display the fiber measurement page push the RESULTS key The page displays Both instruments connected to the link local and distant The Results table with the last measurement made The tested fiber parameters Once the results page is displayed push the START STOP button The details of the next fiber to be tested are displayed Cable id cable 1 Fiber id JDSU Fiber Code Fig 95 Details of the following fiber to be tested To test a different fiber to the one displayed select the new fiber according to its number or its color code Use the direction keys 4 and gt to change the number or color code of the fiber to be tested Changing the fiber number involves a modification of the color code and vice versa Before making the measurement check that the reference measure ments are correct see Establishing a ref
221. it error rate BER of the optical system The consequence is that the PMD limits the transmission bit rate on a link It is then important to know the PMD values to calculate what are the bit rate limits of the links The method used to measure the PMD is based on the Fixed Analyzer Method which requires a broadband polarized source at one extremity and a polarized variable Optical Spectrum Analyzer OSA at the other extremity Broadband Fixed 4 Rotatable light source Polarizer CO SLED Link under test Optical Spectrum Analyser OSA Fig 6 Fixed Analyzer Method used to measure the PMD The method used to measure PMD is the Fast Fourier Transform Method FFT From the spectrum the mean period of the amplitude modulation is measured The Fast Fourier Transform Method into a time distribution will give a Gaussian curve and the mean DGD value is determined from this curve for fiber links with strong mode coupling 1 This is standardized by the ANSI TIA EIA FOTP 113 Polarization Mode Disper sion Measurement for Single Mode Optical Fibers by the Fixed Analyzer Method User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 1 Principles of measurement Principle of measurement of Chromatic Dispersion CD OTDR using pulse delay method It is not necessary to modify the polarization angle of the analyzer when strong mode coupling is used For weak mode coupling an angle could be selected to get the maxim
222. l control itis possible to emulate hard keys with Virtual Control buttons buttons bar To display these buttons click once on the top of the screen in the status bar at the same height than the date and time User Manual 780000102 16 35 Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface Using an external keyboard mouse and screen touch options ieee ee ee Fig 17 Virtual control buttons bar The virtual control buttons bar is displayed during a few seconds You may click on any of these buttons to obtain exactly the same results than using the real buttons in the front panel of the Base Unit The virtual control buttons bar can not be displayed within desktop AN applications see the User Manual of the Base Unit D NOTE This virtual control buttons bar is especially useful when the Base Unit screen is exported on a remote PC see the User Manual of the Base Unit Equivalence Although it is intended primarily to replace the Edit menu of the Base between Unit the external keyboard can replace all the buttons and keys of the Base Unit except the ON OFF button external keyboard and The menu keys to the right of the screen are replaced by the func tion keys F1 to F7 Base Unit The buttons below the screen are equivalent to Ctrl a letter see table below The direction keys have the same function on the external keyboard and on the Base Unit Function on the Base Unit External keyboard
223. le file The softkey Next Trace is used to activate the menu of the following trace in an overlay configuration OTDR and OSA only Ges NOTE If you want to store traces on CD ROM and if no CD is set into the MTS T BERD 8000 or if the CD is write protected then the following message is displayed Selected Storage device not pres emt OQ Woite peocecicec Please select another CevileE User Manual 780000102 16 255 Chapter 15 File management Explorer Function To copy the configuration on to all the tabs lt Copy Setup for all gt Fig 124 Copy Setup For All The button Copy Setup For all applies the configuration modifications made in the File menu displayed into the File menus of the other appli cations managed by the base appearing in the other tabs Explorer Function Setup Explorer Link Mgr Fig 125 Setup Explorer To access the Explorer function after pressing the FILE button press the Setup Explorer Link Mgr key Description Of The explorer is used to select the storage medium and to create or the explorer rename directories and files The left hand part presents the storage architecture Use the keys 4 and W to move around among all the media and their respective directories The right hand part displays all the files present in the directory selected The direction keys can be used to move horizontally between the two parts and vertically within each zone At the top o
224. length if defined User Manual 780000102 16 79 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Reference Trace function If one or several bends have been detected the screen displays the 3 first macro bends detected as well as for each one the distance and the delta loss between the two wavelengths dB itaee n 23 701 aai oad End of Fiber 2 02 km Total Loss 2 80 dB rer seres ja m mn Ewoo ais Fig 34 Fault location Bend The reflectometry trace is displayed with in addition a dotted vertical line set on the end of launch cable W if the Launch Cable is defined in the SETUP menu and a dotted vertical line on the end of fiber The Cursor and Zoom keys are available As with the OTDR mode a summary of the results can be displayed selecting Summary with the Table Summary key Save the trace pushing the FILE button Once the trace is saved it can be recalled and displayed either in OTDR mode with analysis if the Standard Mode is selected in the configuration menu orin Fault Locator mode with indication on the end of fiber if the Fault Locator mode is selected in the configuration menu Reference Trace function 80 The reference trace function consists in defining trace s which will be blocked on screen and used as models before acquiring or loading other standard trace s User Manual 780000102 16 Using the reference trace function in the Result pag
225. les when the explorer is displayed the active trace for the selected tab is from the displayed in the File Signature Explorer You can then save the active trace 1 Select a directory by clicking once on it 2 Click on Store to save the active trace or click on Next Trace to change the file signature on the top part of the screen and to save the next trace from traces in overlay Click on Save If you wish click on FILE button to display the Explorer page for another application and save using the same method the active trace from this application 264 User Manual 780000102 16 OOM Memnres ene a Ccoa GE SCEN Chapter 15 File management Explorer Function Displayed when two active overlaid traces are open The trace dexcribed in the file si gnature will be saved in the direc tory selected in this example Demo Curves ilai Eoi co C084 Cainu Soins Loading files and displaying traces Simple loading Load with configuration Fig 129 Saving active trace from the explorer This will open automatically the edition keypad in order to give a filename for the active trace To access the functions for loading one or more files select the file s in the explorer and press Load Several options are then available The key View Trace s enables simple loading of traces using the current parameters of the Base Unit The current trace is then replaced with this new trace The key Load Tr
226. lick on Show Prev choice or Show Next Choice to display the previous and next versions available 10 Click on Confirm this Choice to start the upgrade of the selected software s or Click on Confirm All Choices to upgrade all versions mee NOTE The software versions list does not always appear cf previous ver sions as well as the Show Previous Show Next Choice buttons and the Confirm Continue key In this case the upgrading starts automatically Upgrading begins The Base Unit is automatically rebooted Upgrading takes several minutes At the end the Base Unit is auto matically restarted if the boot version is superior to version 01 16 11 On the PC close the two windows opened to perform the installa tion Installation Before starting the software upgrade via Ethernet make sure the IP from Ethernet adress of the PC server 1 Press in succession Expert Tools gt Software Upgrade gt Upgrade via Ethernet The message Verify IP address of PC server appears 2 Click on Continue User Manual 780000102 16 25 Chapter 2 Getting started Installing a new version of the software Installation from a CD ROM with MTS T BERD 8000 only 26 The list of the software versions available on the PC is displayed next to the versions installed on the Base Unit Click on Show Prev choice or Show Next Choice to display the previous and next versions available Click on Confirm this Choice to start the upgrade o
227. ll as the Show Previous Next Choice buttons and the Confirm Continue key In this case the upgrading starts automati cally Upgrading starts The Base Unit is automatically rebooted The installation process takes several minutes At the end the Base Unit is automatically restarted if the boot version is superior to version 01 16 Installation You must be equipped with a CompactFlash memory card with a from a Minimum capacity of 128 Mo CompactFlash memory card with MTS T BERD 8000 only The Software Upgrade from a Compact Flash memory card is not possible if the instrument is delivered with the Application Card reference E80CFAPP 1 Switch off and unplug your Base Unit 2 Insert the CompactFlash memory card in which the new unzipped software has been loaded into the slot on the Base Unit provided for this purpose 3 Connect the Base Unit into mains with the AC plug and switch it on Press the SYSTEM button then successively Expert tools gt Soft ware Upgrade gt Copy from CF 5 Click on Confirm The list of the software versions available on the PC is displayed next to the versions installed on the Base Unit 6 Click on Show Previous choice or Show Next Choice to display the previous and next versions available 7 Click on Confirm this Choice to start the upgrade of the selected software s or Click on Confirm All Choices to upgrade all versions User Manual 780000102 16 27 Chapter 2 Getting started
228. markers may be added or by performing a manual measure ment The next step consists in memorizing all markers by selecting Lock Evts in the Process page User Manual 780000102 16 101 Chapter 6 Bi directional OTDR Troubleshooting NOTE If the auto mode was set for the referencing it is recommended to change to manual mode for the next fibers This will ensure that setup parameters used for all the fibers will be the same than those used for the reference trace Finally a bi directional automatic measurement is performed for each fiber Results are stored in either one OEOy file or two SORy files Troubleshooting Warning errors after pressing the key START 102 Error message Possible problem Possible solution No data link Acti vate connection before START No data connec tion Go back to System page to establish a connection No tab OEO OTDR on remote 8000 Unit No software option OEO OTDR on remote Base Unit Bi directional mea surement impossible if no software option on remote Base Unit Remote 8000 Unit not ready OTDR resource has not been selected Go back to the Sys tem page on the remote 8000 Unit to select the OTDR func tion No resource for remote 8000 Unit OTDR resource is already being used Stop measurement on remote 8000 Unit to free the resource No response from remote 8000 Unitt Data link problem Check the data con
229. measurement is processed the fiber is displayed in red When the fiber connection is established information providing the module type and available wavelengths is displayed for both local and distant units 2 User guide zone A blue banner is displayed in the center of the screen where operation messages are displayed The icon for keeping all events in memory Fa is displayed in this zone if the key Lock Evt Free Evts is set on Lock Evt In this case the following measurement is performed using those markers see Memorization of the position of events page 76 mes NOTE This function keeps markers in memory for both local trace and dis tance trace 3 Measurement status zone When a bi directional measurement has been launched all the different steps in the measurement process are presented in this zone Each one is detailed later in this chapter mee NOTE The general information banner is displayed at the top of the screen as for all other tabs When a OEO measurement is performed Data 25 and Remote mode fy icons are displayed as soon as a data connection is established 2 requires active data connection User Manual 780000102 16 93 Chapter 6 Bi directional OTDR Performing a bi directional measurement Data connection status Fiber connection status Information zone User guide zone Measuremen t status zone Identifier of the origin or end of the Information Information f
230. ms Wavelength Range Chapter 11 CD measurements using phase shift method Configuring the CD test None No alarm management Active Enable the Pass Fail evaluation according to the defined thresholds see below Auto Values Yes The maximum dispersion tolerance is automatically set according to the bit rate information Bit rate info List all available rates To select one use the direction arrow keys lt q and gt See CD standards and limits on page 203 for ore information about bit rate info parameter Auto values No Threshold value is entered manually select the maximum dispersion threshold ps nm from 1 to lt 10000 ps nm NOTE Max dispersion threshold is always considered for non normalized dispersion values The Pass Fail indication is provided in the result display trace summary and results table Mode This parameter enables to set the displayed wavelength range Full From 1260 to 1640 nm S C L Band From 1460 to 1625 nm C L Band From 1530 to 1625 nm C Band From 1530 to 1565 nm ITUCWDM Displays the ITU T G 694 2 CWDM channels exclu sively ITUDWDM Displays the ITU T G 694 1 DWDM channels exclu sively With ITUDWDM parameter spacing of channels can be fixed at 25 GHz 50 GHz 100 GHz or 200 GHz User Manual 780000102 16 193 Chapter 11 CD measurements using phase shift method Performing a Reference measurement Manual Displays results between 2 user
231. n Expert mode to display all the events make sure that the detec tion threshold selection in the SETUP menu is All Two types of tables of results are possible with the MTS T BERD 8000 A table with a line displayed under the trace and giving the type and characteristics of the event nearest to the cursor 64 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Table of results A table giving the type and the characteristics of all the events detected during the automatic measurements the 8 lines displayed correspond to the 8 events nearest to the cursor The line corre sponding to the event nearest to the cursor is highlighted This high lighting moves if the cursor is moved At the top of the table a line shows the generic parameters of the fiber numbers of events present total ORL of the link marker locking icon and launch cable length if selected Change of table To obtain the 8 line table select the Table function on the Trace Table Summary key To return to display of a single line in the table select the Trace function To display a summary of the results for 2 traces or more in overlay select the Summary function An additional window is displayed with issue highlighted in case of problem including bend with singlemode and including propagation delay in multimode LSmomn SJotocme Hius Fig 27 Summary Results and Bend Table to the expert mode because the Summary function
232. n another trace press the Advanced key then select Lock Evts The event memoriza tion icon will appear in the title bar 76 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Fault Locator Mode The positions memorized will then be used in the subsequent measure ments either at the end of the manual acquisition or when a stored trace is recalled mes NOTE This function memorizes the markers placed on the current trace The following procedure is recommended to start a measurement with markers 1 Carry out an automatic measurement Memorize the position of the events with the Add Marker key Add the manual measurements required keys Advanced gt Manual Measurement CAUTION If a marker is added with the Add Marker key after manual measure ments have been performed then all the markers on the trace will be converted into AUTO markers and an automatic measurement will be performed using these markers The previous manual measurements will be lost Provided the event memorization icon is displayed the automatic measurement following the acquisition IS carried out using the markers which were present before the acquisition If you wish to make a measurement without markers deactivate memo rization of events by pressing the Free Evts key Fault Locator Mode Function The Fault locator mode is used to detect the distance of the end of fiber from its origin Consequently il allows to detect
233. n of delays Fiber under test 12 lt P Delay On the basis of the 4 results obtained the Base Unit defines the curve representing the delay as a function of wavelength by using one of the following numerical approximation algorithms Quadratic A BA CA2 parabolic curve Sellmeier 3 term A BA2 CA 2 Sellmeier 5 term A BA2 CA 2 DA4 EA 4 It then calculates the drift of this curve in order to obtain the coefficient of dispersion D as a function of wavelength It then calculates the drift of this last curve in order to obtain the disper sion slope Delay drift gt Coeff of drift D Dispersion dispersion slope S So 1310 1480 25 nm as a e Wavelength corresponding to zero dispersion Fig 8 Example of curves obtained by quadratic approximation User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 1 Principles of measurement Principle of measurement of Chromatic Dispersion CD ODM using phase shift method Principle of measurement of Chromatic Dispersion CD ODM using phase shift method The Phase shift method A modulated broadband light is sent over the Fiber Under Test The phase of the test signal is compared to the phase of the reference signal The measured value is the group delay corresponding to a wavelength interval between the reference phase and the test wavelength phase It is measured in the frequency domain by detecting recording and processing the phase shift of The modulated signals The
234. n the measurement A message indi cates there is traffic on the fiber and asks you if you wish to continue or not If you click on NO the measurement is not launched Ifyou click on YES the measurement is performed despite the traffic NOTE If the measurement is validated despite the traffic key YES the next measurement will be automatically performed even if traffic is still detected on fiber If the measurement is cancelled key NO and the START STOP pushed another time the box asking if you wish to continue or not is displayed Acquisition in real time must not be used if a precise measurement is required because of the high noise level but it is sufficient for rapid opti mization of a connection and for observing a fiber in process of utilization User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Acquisition To carry out an acquisition in real time after selection of the requisite acquisition parameters see Acquisition parameters on page 47 Hold the START key down for about two seconds to launch the acquisition in real time whatever is the Acquisition mode selected in the Setup menu orchoose the Real time mode of acquisition in the SETUP menu then press the START STOP key The red Testing indicator will go on to show that real time acquisition is in progress The trace acquired is displayed in real time An indicator of the state of the connection Good Bad is dis
235. nction must be validated in the SETUP menu on the Notes line The notes are displayed under the selected event in the results table Uncertainty of results The following cases are possible Indicators concerning attenuation measurements Result of a manual measurement between the reference and the cursor using the 2c manual 2 cursors method 5c manual Result of a manual measurement using the 5 cursors method The attenuation displayed is a global result for Fresnel reflections which are not Global Si sufficiently separated As several events are too close together only the attenuation of the last one is Close evts displayed Indicators concerning measurements of slope Few pts Measurement of slope by the least square approximation method without using P many points of acquisition 2 points Measurement of slope by the 2 point method User Manual 780000102 16 69 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Automatic measurement and detection NOTE The SETUP menu Notes line enables display of notes of uncertain ties or of neither the one nor the other Notes cannot be displayed at the same time as uncertainties Automatic measurement and detection 70 This function is only available in Expert Mode Automatic mode enables rapid detection of all the faults in the trace The faults detected are then measured and identified on the screen by markers Only the results exceeding the detection
236. nd 82LFSM2 82LFSM4 5020TF plug in The 5020 TF single mode and multi mode modules contain two reels of fiber for use with a reflectometer They are intended for training and demonstration and can be used as launch cable Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 TEST FIBER SM Fig 137 Front panel of a fiber plug in ex 5020TF SM 298 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 18 Technical specifications Information on fiber plug ins 5020TF and 82LFSM2 82LFSM4 mee NOTE As these plug ins are not test instruments they are not supplied with a certificate of calibration Module 5020TF MM Module 5020TF SM Multimode Single mode Type of fiber used Corning MM Corning SMF 28 Recommended group 1 50140 850nm 1 46750 1310nm indices 1 49660 1310nm 1 46810 1550 1625nm Length of fiber 1 300 30m 466 23m Length of fiber 2 300 30m 1000 50m Attenuation of connectors 0 5 dB 1 1 Guaranteed at 1625 nm except for port 1 of fiber 2 connectors cleaned in good condi tions Recommendations for using fiber 2 long fiber The attenuation per unit length of fiber 2 may be higher near port 1 when measuring a dead zone it is preferable to connect the reflecto meter to port 4 when measuring insertion loss of a connector situated after the launch cable it is preferable to connect the reflectometer to port 1 82LFSM2 82LFSM2 82LFSM4 plug ins contain one reel of singlemode fiber with 82L
237. nd l0 for different types of fiber 15 Chapter 2 Getting started 17 Adapting MTS 5000 series plug ins 18 Installing a plug in in a receptacle and removing it 18 Removing a plug in from a receptacle 19 Inserting a plug in into receptacle 19 Universal connectors and adapters 19 Adapter t p S ci 22 0 ven da wer acne nde lop eed eea g 19 Switching adapter type 0 6 2 eee eee 20 Cleaning the universal connector 45 20 Installing a new version of the software 21 Where and how to obtain the new software 21 Downloading from Internet 000002 e ee eee 21 Installation from aPC 1 ee 22 Installation from the harddisk of a PC 22 Installation from the CD ROM drive ofa PC 24 Installation from Ethernet 0 0 0 0 ce eee eee 25 Installation from a CD ROM with MTS T BERD 8000 only 26 Installation from a CompactFlash memory card with MTS T BERD 8000 only is pan eraa e cece eee eee 27 Installation from a USB memory stick 28 Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface 31 Display Screen s erior ieri deridet OA ee ee be ee 32 Top status bar 2 0 2 cee 32 Mini trace 2 cst bee fain E EE ats picasa 33 Signature of the measurement 055 33 Main display zone 0 eee ees 33 TabSs aii58 tds ate aG BEE SAE Ree Rows te
238. nd lower wave length selected in the Configuration CD TEST menu See Delay disper sion and slope results on page 180 To return to the choice of CD result to be displayed press the Exit key To operate on these traces positioning markers zoom shift etc press the Config key see Placing of markers on page 178 Whatever the mode of acquisition chosen the following information is always displayed on the result screen Wavelength Name of file if stored Fiber number The information associated with cursors A and B the A and B hori zontal and vertical values the A B horizontal and vertical difference as an absolute value User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 10 CD measurements using pulse delay method Making a chromatic dispersion measurement The alarm indicator P or x if Alarms is active gt Detection of This mode must be used if the end of fiber has not been correctly end of fiber detected in auto mode see End of fiber detection mode on page 174 The screen obtained after the acquisition or after pressing the RESULTS button displays the information seen in the paragraph Information always displayed on page 176 together with the OTDR detection trace azone at the bottom of the screen giving the distance of the end of fiber and the position of the center of the future analysis window the OTDR detection mini trace to the left of the bar Te f Start CL Measure aama qon Pe
239. ndex of 1 30000 to 1 69999 The selection of an index alters the value of the section AB actual distance between cursors A and B mes NOTE With the CWDM Module the selection is as follows Forlasers 1271 1291 1311 1331 and 1351 select the line 1310 SM For lasers 1371 to 1511 select the line 1360 1510 SM Forlasers 1531 1551 and 1571 select the line 1550 SM Forlasers 1591 and 1611 select the line 1625 SM or if the actual distance between the cursors A and B is known enter its value under Section AB to establish the index of the fiber Selection of this distance causes the display of the indices The extreme distance values are given by the index values 1 30000 a 1 70000 Predefined index Itis possible to choose one of the predefined values given for certain cables The corresponding indices given in the table below are repeated on the screen Wavelength nm 1310 SM 1475 14801510 1550 1625SM ATT SM 1 46600 1 46700 Corning SMF 28 1 46750 1 46810 Corning SMF DS 1 47180 1 47110 Corning SMF LS 1 47100 1 47000 Corning LEAF 1 46890 1 46840 Fitel Furukawa 1 47000 1 47000 Lucent Truewave 1 47380 1 47320 SpecTran SM 1 46750 1 46810 Litespec 1 46600 1 46700 52 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Configuring the reflectometry test Fig 22 Predefined index values Single Mode Wavel
240. ndow to memorize this position Press the Start Measure key to start the CD measurement If an OTDR acquisition is in progress the key START CD A N MEASURE is not displayed Manual mode This mode must be used if the acquisition does not allow the placing of markers on one or more of the four OTDR traces due to insufficient dynamic To select it in the Configuration CD test menu choose Mode Manual augment the acquisition time to enable correct detection of the end of the fiber or the reflective event to be analyzed press the START STOP button to start the CD measurement mee NOTE If the reflective events are drowned in noise it is advisable to use ter mination connectors See Typical specifications of CD OTDR plug ins on page 294 End of acquisition After an acquisition on the 4 wavelengths or after recall of CD results memorized the result screen displays the traces acquired User Manual 780000102 16 175 Chapter 10 CD measurements using pulse delay method Making a chromatic dispersion measurement Choice of CD result Return to this chosen screen Configuration Information always displayed 176 f y A CESS Lea i p027 1058748 AB 526 940 72 7000 A Fig 67 Traces acquired The Delay Dispersion and Slope keys give access to the corre sponding results which depend on the zone of measurement the formula of approximation and the upper wavelength a
241. ned wavelengths The user must then select the wavelength to lt start gt with and the wavelength to lt end gt with ITUCWDN Displays the ITU T G 694 2 CWDM channels exclu sively ITUDWDNM Displays the ITU T G 694 1 DWDM channels exclu sively With ITUDWDM parameter spacing of channels can be fixed at 25 GHz 50 GHz 100 GHz or 200 GHz Telecom Displays 4 wavelengths 1310 1480 1550 1625 nm Modify Inc Wavelength if necessary in the mode edition menu This parameter is used to define how many points shall be considered in the table and spectrum analysis Normalized to km No The AP result shall be provided in dB Yes The AP result shall be provided id dB km result calcu lated according to fiber length and total attenuation AP Measurement On the measurement examples below only the OBS 55 will be described However it can be easily replaced by E81BBS2A 1 Select the AP function in the Instrument SYSTEM menu To do this press the SYSTEM button then select the AP function and press the key amp Fig 61 AP icon selected 2 Press the button RESULTS to display the auto calibration status A bargraph tuning informs of the progression state of the calibration at the bottom of the screen Wait for the calibration to be fully completed before continuing User Manual 780000102 16 159 Chapter 9 Attenuation profile AP Measurement 3 Press the button SETUP to access to the Base Unit confi
242. nnector Universal connectors and adapters Fiber Optic plug ins may come equipped with a universal connector and adapter selected at time of order Adapter typeS JDSU offers 5 different adapters all compatible with this connector allowing the user to switch from one adapter to another according to which fiber type he intends to work with User Manual 780000102 16 19 Chapter 2 Getting started Universal connectors and adapters Adapter types supplied are FC SC DIN ST and LC Panel Kx A Ro f a vi Soe 3 Fy F A SOE FC Adapter EUFCAD j DIN Adapter EUDINAD LC Adapter EULCAD P ST Adapter EUSTAD L SC Adapter EUSCAD Fig 12 5 different types of adapters may be mounted on the universal connector Switching In order to switch from an adapter to another proceed as shown adapter type Pull out in the direction of the arrow in order to release the adapter from the lug holes To place an adapter position the handle as shown in order to engage with the the lugs push hard and pull the handle down os Fig 13 Removing and refitting an adapter Cleaning the Remove the adapter in order to access the ferrule and clean it using a universal cotton swab connector 20 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 2 Getting started Installing a new version of the software Installing a new version of the software A A A Where and h
243. non saturated reflecting event at shortest pulsewidth 6 ADZ measured at 0 5 dB on the basis of a linear regression from a reflectance of type FC PC 55 dB at shortest pulsewidth 7 Not available for E8156SRL Classes of the lasers of the Module Standard EN 60825 1 Ed FDA21CFR OTDR plug ins 1 2 2001 08 1040 10 Multimode MM at 850 nm Class 1M Class 1 Multimode MM at 1300 nm Class 1 Class 1 Single mode SR SRe VSRE Class 1 Class 1 Singlemode UHD at 1310 nm Class 1M Class 1 Singlemode UHD at 1550 amp Class 1 Class 1 1625 nm Singlemode LR amp VLR at 1310 and 1383nm Class 1M Class 1 at 1490 1550 and 1625 nm Class 1 Class 1 288 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 18 Technical specifications Reflectometer plug ins EN 60825 1 Ed FDA21CFR Module Standard 1 2 2001 08 1040 10 Single mode MR Class 1 Class 1 Multimode SRL Multimode Singlemode SRL Glass 1M Glass IM Ranges Ranges for MM plug ins 3 ns 20 ns 50 ns 200 ns 0 5 km X X X 1km X X X X 2km X X X X 5 km X X X X 10 km X X X X 20 km X X X X 40 km X X X 80 km X Ranges for SRL Multimode Plug ins 3 ns 10 ns 0 5 km 30 ns 100 ns 300 ns 1km 2km 5 km x x x x x 5 10 km X lt lt X lt X lt Xx 20 km lt x x Xx gt lt 40 km 80 km X X X lt XK Xx X X lt X K g
244. not valid with an OFI module NOTE As ORL manual is an option establishing a reference for this mea surement is not automatically available with the OFI module The page displays The results screen with the wavelength and the ORL references established The table where are saved the ORL measurements Before making the measurement check that the reference measure ments are correct see Establishing a reference for an ORL manual measurement page 225 Push the START STOP key to start the measurement To display the fiber measurement page push the RESULTS key For each wavelength push the key Keep Result to display the result in the table The Clear Table softkey orders deletion of all the results displayed in the table User Manual 780000102 16 225 Chapter 12 OFI Module File Management If the Alarm function has been activated any result that exceeds the selected thresholds appears in red in the table En 2444 wissiesinichovihe Fig 100 Results for an ORL manual measurement Once all the results are displayed click on the FILE button to save the file in a directory File Management Storing results Although each measurement is automatically stored for FOX results only it is possible to save the results under a different file name direc tory etc Once the results are displayed 1 Push the FILE button 2 Select Setup with the key Setup Explorer 3 Modify the paramet
245. nt or copy them on to another medium or to display the corresponding traces in overlay see Display of several traces in overlay on page 266 To do this press after each selection The files selected appear in video inverse To deselect a file place the cursor on the name of the file and press the key again meee NOTE If a mouse is used click on a file to select it and click again to dese lect it To select a list of files using the keys of the Platform 1 Select and validate the first file of the list red display 2 Set the cursor on the last file of the list blue display 262 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 15 File management Explorer Function 3 Press the right direction key gt to select all the files from the list L ees TETY Betti Fig 128 List of files selected If no file has been selected by the amp key the file where the cursor is positioned is taken as selected On the other hand if a file has been selected with the e amp key and the cursor is on another file the latter is not selected Commands When a file is selected the keys offer the following functions relating to files lt Load gt Opens the sub menu for display of traces See chapter Loading files and displaying traces on page 265 lt Select all gt Direct selection of all the files in the directory After this key has been pressed its name changes to lt Deselect All gt so that the operation can be cancelled if n
246. nt directory mee NOTE If you wish to store your macro at a specific place on your storage media make sure you use the file explorer to set that place as your current directory To reload this macro later on go to the file explorer and load the file The macro will automatically take the first available place in the list of your 10 macros The macro can not be loaded if no macro position is available User Manual 780000102 16 277 Chapter 16 Macros Storing a macro 278 User Manual 780000102 16 Printer This chapter describes the function the configuration and use of the Printer module i This module is only applicable to the 8000 series platform The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows Function of the printer module on page 280 Loading a new paper roll on page 281 Setting up the printer on page 282 Printing a page on page 282 User Manual 780000102 16 279 Chapter 17 Printer Function of the printer module Function of the printer module The printer module 82PRINTER brings an internal printer to the Base Unit The printer itself may be completely integrated in the Base Unit module or may be fully exposed Exposing the In order to load a new paper roll see Loading a new paper roll page printer 281 or to see clearly the printer normally hidden within the printer module you may expose the internal printer Locking screws Lever to release A A Ay mod
247. nt quickly the automatic mode of acquisition is the easiest It enables the Base Unit to be automatically configured with the optimum parameters of acquisition for the link under test The 3 stages of the measurement described above are then carried out auto matically To start an automatic acquisition inthe Configuration CD test menu choose Mode Auto press the START STOP button The user can obtain the results step by step by using one of the following two methods End of fiber detection mode This mode must be used if the end of fiber has not been correctly detected or if the user wants to test part of the link It measures the length of the fiber before carrying out the CD measurement To select this mode Inthe Configuration CD test menu choose Mode End of Fiber User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 10 CD measurements using pulse delay method Making a chromatic dispersion measurement Press the START STOP button The Base Unit then automati cally displays the result screen and the test progress bar Athe end of the acquisition on the OTDR trace the cursor auto matically positions itself on the end of fiber Ifyou consider that the marker is correctly placed on the end of fiber press the Start CD Measure key to start the CD measure ment Ifyou consider that the marker is not correctly placed on the end of fiber or the event to be analyzed adjust its position and then press Change Wi
248. nu key 0 00 e eee eee 146 Display of PMD results 0000200 eee 147 Statistics results i secs etre cence elke ee ee 149 Table of resultS a sa pcs ede pete bee eee ee 149 Graphics display 00 0 E a eee 149 Information messages 2 00e eee eee 150 File Management 22 eee eee eee e eens 151 Storing PMD results 00000 cece eeee 151 Recalling PMD files 20020000 0000s 151 PMD standards and limits 2 00e ee eee 152 User Manual 780000102 16 xii Table of Contents Abacus for a typical system 152 Chapter 9 Attenuation profile 155 Recommended equipment 0 2 0005 156 AP Setup menu 2 20 eee 156 Acquisition parameters 00 0 0 157 Acquisition band ssar iee aeree a sin a irie e a 157 Averaging acquisition 00000 eee eee 158 Make Reference 0 0c cece eee eee eee 158 Measurement r cei nore ode ee ed ee ee ek 158 Results Screen 2 e e eee eee ee eee eee 158 AP Measurement e2 cece eee eee eee 159 Performing the reference 0 160 Performing a AP measurement 2 0055 161 Display of AP results 0 00 eee eee eee 162 Trace display is 6 reun eta a ben ba een Bae melee ded 163 Results tables isn ee A ee eR 165 File Management 2 00 eee eee eee eee 165 Storing Attenuation Profile measurements
249. ometer plug ins 10ns 30ns 100ns 300ns 1us 3 us 10 us 10 km x x x x x 20 km x x x x x 40 km x x x x x x 80 km x x x x x x 260 km x x x CWDM OTDR Modules Technical Typical values measured at 25 C unless otherwise indicated Specifications 81xxCWDM 81xxCWDM Central Wavelength 1551 5 nm 1471 5 nm 1571 5 nm 1491 5 nm 1591 5 nm 1511 5 nm 1611 5 nm 1531 5 nm Typical RMS Dynamic Range 42dB 42dB 42dB 42dB 42dB 42dB 42dB 42dB Distance Range up to 380 km Pulse width 3ns to 20 us Event Dead Zone 0 8 m4 Attenuation Dead Zone 4m Laser safety Class 21 CFR Class 1 Continuous Wave Output 3 5 dBm Power Modulated wave output power 3 Auto 270 330 1k 2k Hz 9s aBm 1 Laser at 10 us and 25 C 2 Typical value corresponding to the difference in dB between the level of back diffusion extrapolated at the beginning of the fiber and the RMS noise level after 3 minutes of averaging with the largest pulsewidth 3 EDZ measured at 1 5 dB below the peak of a non saturated reflecting event at shortest pulsewidth 4 at 1310 nm 5 ADZ measured at 0 5 dB on the basis of a linear regression from a reflec tance of type FC UPC 55 dB at shortest pulsewidth User Manual 780000102 16 291 Chapter 18 Technical specifications WDM plug ins Ranges for CWDM OTDR plug ins 3ns
250. on or to modify the signa ture of a stored trace only l When recalling a trace fiber parameters are shown in the signature Rules for naming In the name of the file it is possible to program automatic inclusion of files parameters such as the name of the fiber fiber code identifiers of the cable its origin its end or the measurement parameters direction reso lution wavelength pulse length User Manual 780000102 16 247 Chapter 15 File management File configuration menu The lt Filenaming gt line shows the current filenaming rules and can be used to modify them To edit or modify these rules Go to to the Filenaming line Press to call up the edit menu Move around in the edit screen using the direction keys Select the desired characters and parameters Confirm each parameter or character selected by clicking on amp oa fF WO N Select Enter or Cancel to quit the edit screen according to whether the modifications are to be applied or not a saa Fig 119 Editing filenaming parameters The key DEFAULT FILENAME is displayed when the line Filenaming is selected and allows to apply the file default name to the trace opened Example of filenaming File parameters Filenaming rules selected Filename obtained Resolution 16 cm ABC Resolution Fiber_ Fiber_Code ABC16_cmFiber_1 Fiber number 1 certain length the names will be truncated in the display on the Base A file n
251. on A ifa USB key is connedcted onto the Platform the icon rx The File menu and the Results page can include a scaled down repre sentation of the trace which may show the location of the zoom zone corresponding to the main display The part of the trace shown in the main display is boxed on the mini trace This mini trace will only appear if the trace originated from an Base Unit Other Bellcore files read on this instrument do not contain the information needed to display it A status bar repeats the parameters of the measurement and in some cases the position of the cursors acomment the name of the file when the result is recalled from a memory The central zone of the screen can display the configuration of the instru ment or the measurement the memory explorer of the Base Unit the measurement results etc Refer to the chapter dealing with the measure ment in progress When the instrument performs several different functions OTDR WDM Power Meter etc the various configuration or results pages are acces sible from tabs To change from one tab to another the button selecting the page must be pressed To example onthe Results page to change from one tab to the other press the RESULTS button User Manual 780000102 16 33 Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface Display screen n Soft keys Icons 34 onthe measurement configuration page to change from one tab to the other press the SETUP
252. one end Section Measure one section from an extremity making two acquisitions on each extremity of the section See Measurement of CD on a section on page 183 170 User Manual 780000102 16 Results Screen parameters Alarms Chapter 10 CD measurements using pulse delay method Configuring the CD test Approximation formula Select the delay approximation formula to be used for generation of the dispersion and slope curves Please refer to ITU T G 650 1 or IEC 60793 1 42 for further information Quadratic A BA Ca 2 Recommended for G 653 fibers in the 1550 nm area Sellmeier 3 term A Bi2 C2 2 Recommended for G 652 fibers in the 1310 nm area Sellmeier 5 term A Bi2 C172 D24 EA4 Recommended in all other cases including non homogeneous fibers see Most suitable method of approximation according to trace zone on page 15 Fiber Type Choose the fiber type you want to measure Standard Special Select Special for a link having a fiber section with shifted dispersion For the other cases select Standard None None selected Selecting this option removes access to the Auto Values and Bit rate info options they will disappear from the screen Active To include any survey alarms The following fields are then enabled Auto Values Yes Threshold values and analysis band are automatically calculated and adjusted in accordance with the selected information from the Bit rate info table Bit rate info A ta
253. onnectors Reference Universal FC Adapter EUFCAD Universal SC Adapter EUSCAD Universal ST Adapter EUSTAD Universal DIN Adapter EUDINAD Universal LC adapter EULCAD 1 Interchangeable in the field 310 User Manual 780000102 16 RoHS Information This appendix describes the RoHS Restriction of Hazardous Substances information which are mandatory requirements from China The RoHS directive consists in the restriction on the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical or electronic equipment sold or used in the European Union after July 1 2006 These substances are lead mercury cadmium hexavalent chromium polyubrominated biphenyls and polybrominated diphenyl ethers The follwoing chapters are described Concerned products 8100 modules series on page 312 Concerned products OTDR 8100 Modules Series on page 313 Concerned products All OTDR VLR 8100 Modules Series on page 314 Concerned products PMD and WDM 8100 Modules Series on page 315 User Manual 780000102 16 311 Appendix A RoHS Information Concerned products 8100 modules series Concerned products 8100 modules series Nb 8000 series China RoHS E FIA A oh VS il BE TE fa PMLA 39 5 i mT JEP oe de tt China ROHS ZSR A 7 m E RMA EA EMARE E WEB oa FA FA HUAL E FYB FF o m4 XXXXXX FA AE H 3 Blk IE as RERE EER m ERIRE mR EMERE A A CN ON BUFE 25 Pika LO BAR DE E INL I BOC UOTE IEA A
254. ons of the acquisition menu then change and offer Choice of channel In the Choice of Channel option either a value may be entered manually or the current value from the table can be taken Manual A new line appears above choice of channel in which the required value can be entered Table The value of the current selection in the results table is used automatically To vary this selection go the the result screen and use Table contents Channel value Here the manual value of the filtering to be performed can be entered using the direction keys 4 and or the numeric keypad Tracking Activating the tracking function will make the internal tunable filter follow slow wavelength changes of optical sources and transmitters providing stable output power The information Locked appears as long as the channel remains within the tolerance limits of the instrument If the channel strays outside the tolerance band the information Unlocked appears User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 7 Optical Spectrum Measurement Drift measurement Using channel After setting sweep mode in the acquisition menu of the SETUP screen filtering on Filtering press the START STOP button to start or stop filtering of the signal Drift measurement The OSA xxx modules provide a Drift measurement application to perform multiple measurements and display the recorded results in a graphical format trace over the time This can be us
255. ontents 7 Press START and define from which end the test will start Manen muster J Cika o g oma Fog Mantenan aae r mma wowa anii mb Fame z no a mon ar batissa o SENEE 2 a ET pan n msasa FO yom veti nat wE G zs Gror tar eecermean ni nme Fig 108 Start the test sequence 8 Inspect before you connect the fiber to test Inspect Clean Inspect again 9 Connect the fiber and press the SCRIPT button when inspection is done 10 Validate each start of measurement OTRD IL ORL PMD AP CD User Manual 780000102 16 237 Chapter 13 Multi Test Access Unit Use of the script specific client option Total test time 3 minutes per fiber 11 In the following screen click on Yes to move to next fiber to test Mesaer erstat es eee sown gt co ermawne metre Erectonns maes Co s corown ymai z fon ro Oain mae _ Set toca bel ms cs aml 2 Saana te wos Soe Weed poe SLT iz Oret te Cemmaes DEY Fig 109 Move to next fiber 12 Once all measurements are performed results are summarized in the overview table and the distant unit can start testing Click on Ok 13 Once all the measurements are performed the result table is displayed When tem ten f gt Chk ienne o g eee s owa Uainn arne Dareetanna mame 3 tne o lt oton prana e m 1 E sno Onga Location mere ar fed scan Leer v oa fee ua Cenn Fa A hee nom
256. or fixed or universal must be specified at time of order Front Panel Optical connectors for plug ins Reference Multi mode SRL OTDR Universal PC Connector with FC adapter EUNIPCFCMM Universal PC Connector with SC adapter EUNIPCSCMM Universal PC Connector with ST adapter EUNIPCSTMM User Manual 780000102 16 309 Chapter 19 Options and accessories References of optical connectors and adapters Front Panel Optical connectors for plug ins Reference Multi mode SRL OTDR Universal PC Connector with DIN adapter EUNIPCDINMM 1 A Connector fixed or universal must be specified at time of order of the plug in Front Panel Optical Connectors for plug ins Reter nc Single mode Universal OTDR and WDM Connector Universal PC Connector with FC adapter EUNIPCFC Universal PC Connector with SC adapter EUNIPCSC Universal PC Connector with ST adapter EUNIPCST Universal PC Connector with DIN adapter EUNIPCDIN Universal PC Connector with LC adapter EUNIPCLC Universal APC Connector for SM only with FC adapter EUNIAPCFC Universal APC Connector for SM only with SC adapter EUNIAPCSC Universal APC Connector for SM only with ST adapter EUNIAPCST Universal APC Connector for SM only with DIN adapter EUNIAPCDIN Universal APC Connector for SM only with LC adapter EUNIAPCLC 1 A connector fixed or universal must be specified at time of order of the plug in Additional Adapters for Universal C
257. or selected If the two cursors A and B are selected the zoom is centred midway between the two cursors The position of the section of trace displayed with respect to the complete trace is represented by a red rectangle on the mini trace at the top left hand corner of the screen To define a zoom on the trace select cursor A or B and center it on the zone to be examined onthe Shift Zoom key select the Zoom function use the gt or 4 key to increase or reduce the zoom factor Zooming on the different events in succession OTDR Zoom on one of the events detected as shown above On the Trace Event key select the Event function Use the 4 and p keys to move the zoom on to the successive events Zooming on the different channels in succession OSA Zoom on one of the channels as shown above On the Trace Channel key select the Channel function Use the 4 and p keys to move the zoom on to the successive channels The Shift function is used to displace the displayed section of the trace by pressing the direction keys The horizontal shift is performed maintaining the point of intersection between the trace and the selected cursor at the same level scrolling the trace horizontally while following it vertically so that it never goes off the screen To use this function Select the zoom factor as described above Choose cursor and cursor position User Manual 780000102 16 39 Chapter
258. ord gt Table 3 Description A plus sign indicates simulta neous keystrokes A comma indicates consecutive key strokes A slanted bracket indicates choosing a submenu from menu Keyboard and menu conventions Example Press Ctrl s Press Alt f s On the menu bar click Start gt Program Files Table 4 This symbol represents a general hazard Symbol conventions xxiv User Manual 780000102 16 About this guide Conventions This symbol represents a risk of electrical shock NOTE This symbol represents a Note indicating related information or tip This symbol located on the equipment or its packaging indicates that the equipment must not be disposed of in a land fill site or as munici pal waste and should be disposed of according to your national regu lations Table 5 Safety definitions WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury User Manual 780000102 16 XXV About this guide Conventions xxvi User Manual 780000102 16 Principles of measurement This chapter gives the principles of the measurements made by the reflectometer OTDR plug ins OSA spectrum analyzers WDM tech nology and PMD analyzers Polarization mode dispersion The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows
259. ore has been selected then results will be saved automatically measurements a Recalling OSA files not or if you want to save the results under another name directory etc 1 2 3 4 Click on FILE key Select Setup with the Setup Explorer key Modify the parameters you want Click on Store Trace The trace is saved with the extension OSA Once an OSA file has been stored recall it using the Explorer A O N Select Explorer with the key Setup Explorer Using directions keys select the directory and then the file to open Click on Load Click on View Tace s or Load Trace Config The selected file is opened For further informations on file management see Chapter 15 File management User Manual 780000102 16 133 Chapter 7 Optical Spectrum Measurement File Management 134 User Manual 780000102 16 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement This chapter describes the different steps in carrying out a PMD measurement with a Base Unit equipped with a 5073PMD or 5073WDMPA plug in and with a 507XExt extension card with a 81PMD 81WDMPMD module or with the OSA XXX series or an ODM Module The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows Recommended equipment on page 136 PMD test setup menu on page 136 Performing a PMD measurement with a 5073XXX plug in or OSA XXX series module on page 141 Performing a PMD measurement with a 81XXX plug in or an ODM plug in on page 145 Display
260. osition 00000 42 Trace resulting from the difference between two traces OSA mod le snug ees eeen Bede ep beule ees sda 43 Removing a trace c ec eee ee ee ee ee 43 Removing the current trace in overlay 43 Removing all the the traces in overlay 43 Quitting the overlay menu 0 cee eee 43 Saving when the instrument is shut down 43 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements 45 Selecting the function 000 eee e eee eee 46 Configuring the reflectometry test 46 Acquisition parameters 0002 00 cee eee 47 Measurement parameters 0 0200020 eeu 50 Result screen ees bee bw eee ee oe ee eee 54 AcquiSitiony 3 c 22 023008 Sek Sik aie ie ie 55 Realtime mode recens t rir bia ee Pia eee ee whee ears 56 Quick Link Test mode 0 0 0 e eee eee 59 Expert acquisition mode 0 0 cee eee eee 61 Multi wavelength acquisition 00000 61 Trace display functions 2 000 cece eee eens 62 Displaying results on the trace 0 00 000 62 EV Mts s1o5 ci catinen an ee aarocys atoc A Gteyaai Sars aes gate 63 Trace Event functions 0 0 0 cece eee ee 63 Criteria for display of an event 00005 63 User Manual 780000102 16 ix Table of Contents Table of results oii ese ees eee elie a 64 Information provided for each event detected 66 Modifyin
261. others give access to certain options as shown in the table of the figure Table 1 Grid menu options for each type of grid ITU CWDM ITU DWDM Regular Manual Grid name Editable Editable Editable Editable ITU standard G694 2 G 692 N A N A Editable from Editable from Editable from N A First ITU 1270 to 1630 1528 77 to 1560 61 1260 to 1650 channel nm by incre nm by increments nm by incre with display ments of 20nm_ corresponding to ments of 0 01 in nm the channel spac nm ing selected User Manual 780000102 16 113 Chapter 7 Optical Spectrum Measurement WDM OSA test configuration Table 1 Grid menu options for each type of grid ITU CWDM ITU DWDM Regular Manual 20 nm Editable from 25 to Editable from N A 200 GHz 20 to 1000 GHz Channel by increments spaci of 1 at each pacing click of 10 if key is held down Number of Editable from 1 Editable from 1 to Editable from 1 Editable from channels to 19 by incre 21 by increments of to 56 by incre 1 to 256 ments of 1 1 ments of 1 Sub menu Sub menu accessi Sub menu Sub menu accessible to ble to display the accessible to accessible to display the wavelengths of display the display the Define wavelengths of each channel wavelengths of wavelengths channels each channel name the band each channel of each chan name the band and name each name the band nel name the and name each channel and name
262. ow to obtain the new software Downloading from Internet When a new software version is loaded there is a risk of re initializa tion of the internal memory Before installing the new software it is therefore advisable to to save the results in the memory using the Save function in the Memory menu called up by the FILE button Do not interrupt the installation process as this could damage the instrument To avoid any interruption of the installation procedure the Base Unit must be operating on the mains if the procedure is started while oper ating on battery a message indicates that the instrument must be connected to the mains Be sure you have configured the Security mode of the equipment to Standard and not to Enhance in the System Page gt I O Interfaces gt Ethernet gt Security see the User Manual of the 6000 or 8000 Base Unit The new version of the software can either be procured on a storage medium CD ROM USB stick memory or CompactFlash memory card from your JDSU Customer Service or can be downloaded from JDSU s internet site www jdsu com When the software is obtained from the Internet it must be saved on a storage medium before the software upgrade of the product can be carried out To do this on the JDSU web site 1 Open the page of the product concerned MTS 8000 or T BERD 8000 Scalable Optical Test Platform 2 Click on the tab Downloads 3 Click on the link 8000 Firmware Update A new pa
263. ow keys to zoom in either hori zontally or vertically The zoom of the display is made around the selected cursor s mes NOTE To reset the zoom and see the full trace press Full scale mes NOTE In FFT display mode data is displayed with an automatically calcu lated zoom Trace shifting within Spectrum display To shift the trace horizontally or vertically press the Zoom Shift menu key then use the direction arrow keys to make the required shift 148 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 8 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement Statistics results Statistics results Table of results Graphics display Statistics can be performed on a series of samples defined by the time between two consecutive samples Wait period and the number of samples The choice of these parameters must be done in the PMD SETUP menu Acquisition mode see Acquisition parameters on page 138 To display the statistic results press the RESULTS button When the statistics are activated the results are in a table giving for the four parameters PMD delay and coefficient PMD2 delay and coeffi cient current value average value min value max value and standard deviation Sdev The statistic results in the table are automatically updated with each acquisition When Statistic mode is selected the button Spectrum FFT becomes Spectrum FFT Drift Barchart This button allows therefore to display alternatively two new windows
264. page 246 Explorer Function on page 256 Link Manager Function on page 266 CD Rom burning MTS T BERD 8000 only on page 269 loaded and traces cannot be displayed or saved see User Without any module into the MTS T BERD the files cannot be AN Manual of the 8000 6000 Platform User Manual 780000102 16 245 Chapter 15 File management File configuration menu File configuration menu This menu is used to configure various parameters common to the whole of a cable Press the FILE button The following File menu appears 135000 Gus w ie SOVEDN 25m Bos IOF 147000 p Filenaming test Fider Cadie tj Ao More No Fhe Type Sor files tore An Treces wSetup sti plors stink Mar FEnsuoma MSJ oma Sars Sarox Fig 117 File Menu example with OTDR plug in Managing tabs Tabs give access to the File menu of each application OTDR OSA Power Meter etc present in the modules and plug ins of the instrument It is possible to open a file even if the corresponding plug in is not present in the instrument e g OSA file without OSA plug in A new tab then temporarily manages this application When several different applications corresponding to modules or plug ins for different measurements are managed by the Base Unit pressing the FILE key several times in succession changes from one tab to another to give access to the file con
265. played below the trace mee NOTE If the connection is bad check and clean the connector jumpers To terminate or interrupt an acquisition in real time mode press the START STOP key Connection quality indicator The connection quality indicator gives the following information State Connection Good The connection is OK Bad Possible causes of a bad result There are several connectors close to the external connector of the MTS T BERD 8000 One of the connectors is dirty or badly connected Replace the launch cable make the connection again properly or clean the connector of the OTDR or of the jumper No fiber is connected If the state of the connection is bad it is still possible to carry out a measurement but the results will not be very reliable User Manual 780000102 16 57 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Acquisition Real time display em lar FETE A Pulse tona Range 2km p Resolution 32 em Average Mode Fig 24 Example of acquisition in real time During an acquisition in real time you can modify the acquisition param eters without returning to the SETUP menu To do this press the Acqui sition Param key you can then use display keys to scroll through the possible values of the various acquisition parameters In real time mode only measurements relating to the cursors are possible but as soon as acquisition stops automatic measu
266. plice and reflectance measurements Two points method 74 section shows the distance between the previous event which may also be the beginning of the link and the end of the slope Thus this section value is not equivalent to the distance between the two slope indicators and Slope shows the slope value in dB km If no result is displayed in the table the distance between the cursors A and B is too small To delete a particular slope measurement result superimpose the cursors A and B on the slope concerned select Slope after if necessary pressing Advanced and then Manual press amp the slope of the specified trace section is deleted There are two methods of carrying out manual measurements of splices on the trace the two cursor method and the five cursor method The five cursor method is the more accurate as it takes into account the difference of level between the slope before the splice and the slope after the splice This method should be used whenever possible If very close events have created a dead zone preventing the measure ment of slope by the five cursor method it is possible to use the two cursor method This considers the difference in level between the cursors Before performing one of these measurements go into the SETUP menu and define the splice detection threshold All is recommended Also confirm display of the results on the trace Results on Trace All
267. quisition bandwidth see noise acq Bandwidth setting NOTE The noise level depends on the noiseacquisition bandwidth so the noise level may be different to the result in the graphical trace NOTE For OSA 320 in OSNR measurement mode the noise level is calcu lated based on the polarization nulling method indicating the noise level at the channel transmission wavelength in band noise measure ment 6 The optical signal to noise ratio for the channel in dB In WDM mode this parameter indicates the out of band SNR result based on the out of band noise measurement User Manual 780000102 16 121 Chapter 7 Optical Spectrum Measurement Table of results 122 NOTE For OSA 320 with I OSNR setting this parameter indicates the true I OSNR in band OSNR measured with the polarization nulling method 7 The ratio between the power of the channel and the composite power in Contents of the table with statistics When selecting the Statistics measurement mode and multiple acquisi tions are performed statistics are calculated on the results To display these results in the table press the Table Contents key then Statistics Different Statistics keys are available to choose the content of the table display for each channel The following statistics can be selected wavelength or frequency statis tics power statistics and SNR statistics The display will give current value average value max value min value and
268. r compensation line to display a sub menu proposing the following options Value Yes activation of compensation and choice of its value using the keys 4 and gt or the numeric keypad from 1 to 30 dB by increments of 1 or 1 to 99 by increments of 0 1 Unit Choice of compensation in dB or as a percentage of the value measured For example with a 10 dB splitter the results will be augmented by 10 dB The trace will be offset upwards by 10 dB A channel measured at 30 dB will be displayed 20 dB 1 Attention all modification of these parameters has immediate repercussions on the trace and entails the loss of the measurement statistics 112 User Manual 780000102 16 Parameters of display and analysis of the results Chapter 7 Optical Spectrum Measurement WDM OSA test configuration Tilt amp Slope Gain No Yes Validates measurement and display of the max difference in gain in dB and slope of the gain in dB per nm or by THz above the trace l Those parameters are valid for all traces present on the screen Grid Go to the Grid line to access the Grid sub menu Select the Type line to see the different choices and modify them if required Five possible types of grid are proposed with different corresponding values some of which are fixed or non applicable others editable The type Conventional and the option Without do not give access to the parameters of the Grid sub menu the
269. r test When dealing with amplifiers optical level attenuators OLA55 1 and OLA55 2 have to be positioned between the source and the amplifier and between the amplifier and the CD tester JDSU recommends to 198 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 11 CD measurements using phase shift method Display of CD results setup the attenuator OLA55 1 so that the power level received by the amplifier is 10 dB lower than the in service power level setup the attenuator OLA55 2 so that the maximum received power level by the CD tester equals 10dBm max Amplified Network 81BBS2A or do 81DISPAP or OLA55 1 2 OLA55 2 OBS 500 550 81MRDISPAP Psource Pi 10dB Ptester 10dBm max 1 Press the SETUP button to access the CD configuration menu 2 Select the appropriate CD test setup according to your application as earlier defined in Configuring the CD test on page 190 3 Select Yes for Amplified link It will limit the acquisition band from 1530 nm to 1565 nm 4 Press the START STOP button to perform CD measurement Display of CD results Once the acquisition is completed the result curve is automatically displayed It is always the Delay curve which is displayed first Fit Formula Alarm pra onns Tussa oem meinte Measured 7 points _ Normationt Nelatrve Orley prim E to Normalized to km Fig 82 Delay Curve User Manual 780000102 1
270. rce which is stable both in time and as a function of temperature Make sure that all connections and fibers and the receiving cell are perfectly clean Use a reference link between the laser source and the test subject If several measurements are to be made under identical light injec tion conditions this reference fiber must not be disconnected during the period while measurements are taking place Insertion loss method 1 The power meter is first connected to the laser source via the refer ence fiber P1 is measured 2 Then the fiber to be tested is inserted between the reference fiber and the power meter P2 is measured The difference between P2 and P1 gives the attenuation of the fiber under test It is preferable to use the same type of connector at both ends of the fiber being tested to ensure the same connection conditions for measuring P1 and P2 14 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 1 Principles of measurement Standards and 10 for different types of fiber Standards and 20 for different types of fiber Fibre non offset offset noa is dispersion dispersion offset dispersion Standard ITU Y ITU T G 652 ITU T G653 ITU T G 655 Standard IEC IEC 60793 1 1 IEC 60793 1 1 IEC 60793 1 1 type B1 type B2 type B3 Standard TIA EIA Iva IVb IVb Approximate Ay 1310 nm 1550 nm 1500 nm or indefinite Most suitable method of approximation according to trace zone Fibre non offset
271. rement is possible The real time mode allows to make Loss ORL or Reflectance measure ment using the A amp B cursors and the key None Loss ORL Reflect Position A amp B cursors on the trace 2 Click as many times as necessary to get the Loss ORL Reflec tance measurement between A amp B cursors The result is displayed under the trace 58 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Acquisition AR 4 a A LOSS 0 A aonar n A 236 i n omar m CLET ese oie Faron ESOO co BAs Fig 25 Example of loss measurement between A amp B cursors Quick Link Test The fastest way of detecting faults in your optical fiber is to use automatic mode 2cduisition mode The MTS T BERD 8000 then uses the acquisition parameters pulse width range and resolution and acquisition time best suited to the fiber to be tested mes NOTE In Quick Link Test mode since all the parameters have been reconfig ured overlay and marker locking are not possible during acquisition Automatic configuration of acquisition Press the SETUP button then 1 onthe Mode line select Quick Link Test 2 On the Laser line select the wavelength of the laser if the MTS T BERD 8000 uses a dual wavelength plug in 3 Select the Measurement and Results Screen parameters wished Acquisition phases in automatic mode When the START STOP key is pressed an automatic configuration procedure selects the optimum p
272. remity selected This information influences the automatic coding of the fiber See Fiber Nbr Increment on page 250 Certain parameters are not valid in the configuration selected Thus if no tube is selected in Cable Content all the lines relating to the tube concept will be deactivated grayed out in the menu Tube Coding Ribbon Coding Fiber Coding Code Definition User Manual The lines Tube Coding Ribbon Coding and Fiber Coding enable selection of the color coding of the tube the ribbon and the fiber from 5 different codes described below TIA USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 and USER 4 The Code Definition line opens a sub menu with which the different color codes possible on the 780000102 16 253 Chapter 15 File management File configuration menu 254 Operator Comment instrument can be displayed and modified see figure Color code definition on page 254 Five different codes can be managed by the Base Unit including a stan dard code The standard code TIA may be displayed but it cannot be modified The other codes called by default USER1 USER2 USER3 and USER4 can be entirely personalized Edited code selects the code for display or modification Copy name to give a new name to the code selected press the gt key which calls up the edit menu View codes displays the color codes 1 to 12 13 to 24 or 25 to 36 Code 1 23 Use the arrow gt to modify the codes if neces sary Edi
273. result in OTDR table 67 specif measurement 284 S Script 235 277 Shift 39 Attenuation Profile 164 CD 178 179 CD trace 178 179 PMD 148 Signal threshold WDM 111 Source display 86 Source option 86 User Manual 780000102 16 Index T Table Notes OTDR 54 Technical specifications 283 Threshold OTDR fiber end 51 reflections 51 splice 50 U Universal connector cleaning 20 USB memory stick 28 User manual references 309 W Wavelength WDM specifications 292 WDM OSA acquisition parameters 108 Configuration 106 difference between 2 traces OSA 43 display param and analysis alarms 114 grid 113 measurement parameters 110 results display 118 SNR parameters 111 Table results notes 123 table results 120 Z Zoom Attenuation Profile 164 CD 179 OTDR 63 PMD 148 WDM OSA 117 320 Test and Measurement Regional Sales North America Latin America Toll Free 1 800 638 2049 Tel 55 11 5503 3800 Tel 1 240 404 2999 Fax 55 11 5505 1598 Fax 1 240 404 2195 Asia Pacific Tel 852 2892 0990 Fax 852 2892 0770 EMEA Tel 49 7121 86 2222 Fax 49 7121 86 1222 8100M02 UM 07 09 AE Rev 16 07 09 English www jdsu com
274. row keys to zoom in either hori zontally or vertically The zoom of the display is made around the selected cursor s NOTE To reset the zoom and see the full trace press Full scale Trace shifting To shift the trace horizontally or vertically press the Zoom Shift menu key to display Shift then use the direction arrow keys to make the required shift User Manual 780000102 16 Results table Chapter 9 Attenuation profile File Management Cursor To move the cursor s on the trace press the Cursor menu key then use the direction arrow keys and W or q and gt The coordinates of each cursor intersection with the trace are indicated underneath the trace Wavelength To move the cursor from one wavelength to the next one press the Wavelength menu key and use the arrow keys and W or 4 and gt The cursor will move both on the trace and in the table if the trace and or the results table is displayed Trace Table Enables the display on the trace and or the results table 8 lines of the results can be displayed below the trace or 20 lines with no trace The results table shows for each wavelength calculated using the wave length range and the incrementation parameter as seen in Wavelength Range on page 158 the attenuation profile in dB km and the total loss in dB File Management Storing Attenuation Profile measurements If you had entered Auto store then the results will be saved automati
275. rrent function and configura tion 850nm 3ns 1 qFiber_2 Aaa FS Jes A 0 00M 36 168dB B 0 00m 36 168dB Event A B 0 00m 0 000dB dB 1A37 370B OZ B Zoom Mh C Shift Zo TdCursor A Cursor B 2 284dBkm OTrace 90232m Table 0 02508 Summary 1803 04m 59 0 00148 2351 40m 0 00948 PATET Auto Set Event Nb Evts 5 Event Distance m Loss dB Reflect dB Slope dB km Length m T Loss dB Advanced CU a2 3 E SM OTDR CIMM OTDR amp 4JOEO OTDR QS Fig 16 Example of display of results with OTDR plug in Top status bar The top status bar on the screen shows on the right current date and time and in the form of icons the type of power supply mains or battery and if the power supply is on battery the level of charge see Battery management in chapter 2 from the Base Unit manual 32 User Manual 780000102 16 Mini trace Signature of the measurement Main display zone Tabs Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface Display screen if saving is in progress the icon S if the Talkset option is present and the telephone is activated the icon 7 if a remote screen is selected the icon WE or he if two users or more are working on the same Base Unit if transfer of data is in progress the icon if a printing process is in progress the icon if a data saving is in progress the icon W if the Web Browser application is active the ic
276. s on page 85 The Laser Source mode is not available with the UHD and SR e modules When the Laser Source key is available on the Setup screen press the key and select the laser wavelength and the mode CW continuous emission 270Hz 330Hz 1KHz 2KHz one SHANG Te PAE factory Deteutts Fig 21 Laser Source Mode Pulse This depends on the type of OTDR module This parameter is exclusively configurable in Expert mode gt Manual User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Configuring the reflectometry test In the case of a multi wavelength acquisition you can define a pulse for each wavelength a select each wavelength in the Laser line and define a pulse b Once all lasers are configrued go back to the pulse line and select Multi you can define a pulse for all lasers a select All on the Laser line b select a pulse which will be comon to all lasers See Typical specifications of OTDR plug ins on page 286 Range This depends on the type of OTDR module The possible range depends on the pulse length selected This range is given for each pulse length in the para graph Ranges on page 289 This parameter is exclu sively configurable in Expert mode gt Manual The Auto parameter allows to detect automatically the range In Auto mode the range is selected as a function of the end of the fiber Resolution From 4 cm to 160 m according to module
277. s and commands of the LTS When the LTS function is selected the following softkeys are available on the results page lt Set as reference gt Selects the current result as reference value to measure the attenuation of a link This reference is displayed under the measurement result until a new reference value is chosen User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 12 OF Module LTS function lt Zero gt Adjustment of the Zero value when the power meter s optical input is closed with a plug lt Keep Result gt Saves the result on the corresponding line of the table lt Clear Table gt Deletes all the results recorded in the table Making a mea The power meter is started up as soon as the LTS function 8 is acti surement v2ted in the SETUP menu gues NOTE Power measurement is automatically updated in consequence The value lt 60 dB is displayed when the laser is switched off and if the source output is looped on to the power meter input If the OFI module s source is used the START STOP key must be used to start or stop emission of light Power Connect the light source to be tested to the rear connector see measurement Connections to the power meter and the source page 208 Inthe SETUP menu choose the units dBm dB or Watts Press the START STOP key to start the laser The result will appear in the results page and can be memorized in the table see Table of results page 212 Press the STA
278. s are the property of their respective companies This guide is a product of JDSU s Technical Information Development Department This manual gives you the main information to install start and use the 8100 Module Series JDSU has established processes in compliance with the Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC This product should not be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste and should be collected separately and disposed of according to your national regulations In the European Union all equipment purchased from JDSU after 2005 08 13 can be returned for disposal at the end of its useful life JDSU will ensure that all waste equipment returned is reused recycled or disposed of in an environmentally friendly manner and in compliance with all applicable national and international waste legislation It is the responsibility of the equipment owner to return the equipment to JDSU for appropriate disposal If the equipment was imported by a reseller whose name or logo is marked on the equipment then the owner should return the equipment directly to the reseller User Manual 780000102 16 v vi Instructions for returning waste equipment to JDSU can be found in the Environmental section of JDSU s web site at www jdsu com If you have questions concerning disposal of your equipment contact JDSU s WEEE Program Management team at WEEE EMEA jdsu com User Manual 780000102 16 Table of Contents
279. s displayed for a few seconds see Connection quality indicator on page 57 then a bar graph shows elapsed and remaining acquisition time At the end of the acquisition the trace is displayed and an automatic measurement is started mee NOTE To stop the acquisition the START STOP key may be pressed at any time Then an automatic measurement is carried out but certain events cannot be detected a manual measurement must then be car ried out Multi if the plug in possesses several lasers to perform successive acquisi wavelength tions on all the wavelengths acquisition In the SETUP menu on the Laser line choose All Start the acquisition manual or automatic by pressing the START STOP button User Manual 780000102 16 61 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Trace display functions Once the acquisition for the first wavelength is finished or to stop it manually click on Stop Wavelength to stop the measurement for this wavelength and automatically start the measurement for the following one The different traces appear in the same window and can be handled simi larly to overlaid traces see Swapping overlay traces on page 42 Trace display functions 62 Displaying results on the trace The trace acquired or recalled from a memory is displayed on the Results page see example Figure 16 on page 32 A number of different functions can modify the display of the trace Cursors Zoom
280. s of the A 1 6 2 5 source 3 5dBm nm Source Se 5055 1569nm dBm Juoi egauis I Fig 88 Source configuration When the laser is on the icon A is displayed 210 User Manual 780000102 16 Display of results and command Result of the measurement in progress _ Chapter 12 OFI Module LTS function The parameters of the source can be accessed directly on the results screen of the LTS module by pressing the Source Configuration soft key Wavelength To change the wavelength when a multi wavelength source is present depending on option The wavelength value is displayed Mode To vary the mode of emission of the source Possible modulation values are 270Hz 330Hz 1kHz 2kHz Auto the sources emit on determined frequencies to enable the power meter to detect the wavelength used automatically Twintest cyclical emission on all available wavelengths for a few seconds on each wavelength compatible with the JDSU OLP 5 6 15 16 18 CW continuous emission The mode used is displayed above the icon A Power In CW mode you can choose the emitted power either the nominal value 3 5 dB or an attenuation of 3 or 6 dBm with regard to this nominal value to get a power of 6 5 dBm or of 9 5 dBm For all the other modes 270Hz 330Hz 1kHz 2 kHz Auto Twintest select one of the following emitted power 12 5 9 5 6 5 dBm The results page called up by the RESULTS but
281. s option appears when the Bit rate info is selected This table lists the available PMD standards that can be used To make a choice use the direction arrow keys 4 and gt For further information about PMD standards refer to the table on page 152 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 8 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement Performing a PMD measurement with a 5073XXxX plug in or OSA XXX series module D lais PMD Delay Maximum delay before an alarm signal PMD Coeff Maximum PMD coefficient before an alarm signal PMD2 Delay Maximum second order PMD delay before an alarm signal Only appears if Coupling is set on Strong PMD2 Coeff Maximum second order PMD coefficient before an alarm signal Delay and coefficient values for PMD and PMD2 can be modified with the directions keys or using the Edit Number key Parameters available in the File Menu are identical to those for other file types see File configuration menu on page 246 Performing a PMD measurement with a 5073XXX plug in or OSA XXX series module It is recommended before performing a PMD measurement at least once a day to carry out a reference measurement of the broadband source The fiber under test is connected to the OBS 55 or E81BBS2A and Base Unit by test cables On the measurement examples below only the OBS 55 will be described But it can easily be replaced by the E81BBS2A Performing the To do this use the following process re
282. setup menu 138 Acquisition parameters a NOTE The key Copy Setup for all is displayed when the PMD function is selected on the ODM module as well as one or several other func tions of this module II allows to apply the PMD configuration to the other selected function s of the ODM module NOTE When the composite power of the input signal is higher than 20 dBm a warning is displayed and the signal is cut off Acquisition band only appears when 81WDMPMD module is used OESCL SCL Sweep Continue Single Statistics Acquisition will be performed on the full band Acquisition will only be performed on S C and L bands There is a continuous measurement with a trace refresh and a real time display of the results There will only be one measurement and display of the result A set of measurements can be performed providing statistics or results This mode also gives access to the two following parameters Long Termand Number of sweeps Averaging acquisition to improve the dynamic range of the unit No Low Medium High Auto NOTE No average of the acquisition sample to be performed Low averaging 4 samples Medium averaging 16 samples High averaging 32 samples The average low medium or high measurement is automatically selected during the reference An increase of the averaging can improve the dynamic range to up to 5 dB User Manual 780000102 16 Measurement parameters
283. spacing setting left and right to the channel center frequency The measurement result will be displayed in the WDM table as Level in dBm SNR parameters To modify these parameters go to the OSNR line A sub menu then appears proposing the following options User Manual 780000102 16 111 Chapter 7 Optical Spectrum Measurement WDM OSA test configuration WDM mode settings SNR method Side of the peak where the point of reference for noise measurement is taken left right average left and right worst case of left and right S lt gt N distance Distance between the peak of the channel and the point of reference for the noise Auto distance determined according to spacing of channels Manual enter a value 0 2 0 4 0 8 nm from the peak if the unit is nm or 25 GHz 50 GHz 100 GHz from the peak if the unit is THz l OSNR mode settings only available for OSA 320 in I OSNR mode OSNR method Auto evaluation for mixed filter shaped ROADM networks Flat Top evaluation for flat top filter shaped ROADM networks Noise Acq Bandwidth Reference bandwidth used for the acquisition of noise standard 100 pm values lie between 10 pm and 10 000 pm Splitter compensation When the measurement is made by the intermediary of a separator also known as a Splitter it is possible to compensate for the loss introduced by this element and to display the value measured before or after it Go to the Splitte
284. splay will show the following screen Fig 45 Exemple of drift measurement wavelength over time In the Drift display the measurement result is shown in a graphical format trace over time scans and a tabular format The table shows the following parameters Channel number number of the displayed channel Wavelength or Frequency of the displayed channel Ref reference value of wavelength power or SNR AVG average value of wavelength power or SNR Min Minimum of wavelength power or SNR Max Maximum of wavelength power or SNR Sdev or Delta standard deviation or delta Min max of wavelength power or SNR All Zoom and Shift functions are available in Drift mode By using the cursor A it is possible to get access to each measured data point The Start value as well as the actual cursor position including the time information is shown in the blue field of the table NOTE If the channel power drifts to a power level below the channel detec tion threshold the measurement will indicate No Signal User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 7 Optical Spectrum Measurement EDFA results analysis EDFA results analysis This feature applies only to instruments OSA XXxX series The results analysis of an EDFA consists in performing two spectrum analysis one before the signal is amplified and another one after the signal is amplified Both traces are further compared providing the resulting power gain
285. t lt Ranges for SR and SRe modules 10ns 30ns 100ns 300ns 1us 3 us 10 us 2 km x x x 5 km x x x 10 km x x x 20 km x x x x User Manual 780000102 16 289 Chapter 18 Technical specifications Reflectometer plug ins 10 ns 30 ns 100 ns 300 ns 1us 10 us 40 km X 80 km 140 km 260 km xXx x x Ranges for UHD plug ins 5 km 10 ns 30 ns 100 ns 300 ns 1us 10 us 20 us 10 km 20 km 40 km 80 km x KX K KY xX 140 km x KX K LK x xX x x x x x 260 km x K K KT Xx Xx x K KX KT XK xX 380 km x x Kx x KL xX x x x x x x x x x x Ranges for LR VLR MR SRL Singlemode plug ins 5km 30 ns xX 100 ns 300 ns 1us 3 us 10 us 20 us 10 km 20 km 40 km 80 km x x x xXx x 3 140 km x K K KY OX x x K xK x 260 km x XxXxX KY xX x KX Xx x xX x x x x 380 km xxx KY xX x x x x x Ranges for VSRE plug ins 1km 10 ns 30 ns xX 100 ns 300 ns 1us 3 us 10 us 2km xX 5km xX 290 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 18 Technical specifications Reflect
286. t Del Res 3 Select Auto Mes Addition of markers i Addition of markers is a function only available in Expert Mode Representation of the markers To carry out a measurement it is advisable to go into the SETUP menu and activate the alarm thresholds in Result Screens gt Alarms validate display of results on the trace in Results on Trace All You can place markers of events on the trace at the exact position where you want to carry out automatic measurements You can also manually place markers in addition to those positioned automatically during automatic measurement You can then start an automatic measurement to obtain the results on all the markers The markers are represented by the symbol l if they are set during automatic measurements or using the Set markers key The markers are represented by the symbol I if they are set during manual measurements in Advanced mode To add markers of events 1 Select a cursor A or B 2 Use the direction keys to move the cursor to the place where you want to position a marker 3 Press the key Add Marker User Manual 780000102 16 71 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Manual measurements Hints on the positioning of markers Deleting markers 4 Anevent marker l is displayed at the position of the cursor and a measurement is carried out on the marker Measurement of slope before the marker starts just after the previous event or at the end of t
287. t is Auto acquisition mode deactivates the Set Event function see Mem A N then re initialized 60 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Acquisition Expert In this mode the MTS T BERD 8000 carries out a number of averagings acquisition defined as a function of the maximum acquisition time specified in the Acquisition menu and then terminates the acquisition The acquisition is mode carried out with the parameters previously selected in the Acquisition menu It may be stopped at any time using the START STOP key To configure a manual acquisition of the fiber under test follow the proce dure described below in the SETUP menu see Acquisition parameters on page 47 1 On the Mode line select Expert Select Manual or Auto using the key Acquis Manual Auto If Manual has been previously selected select the wavelength on the Laser line 4 If Manual has been previously selected on the Pulse line select the required pulse length from the values proposed 5 If Manual has been previously selected select the required Range from the values proposed If Manual has been previously selected select the Resolution On the Acquisition Time line select the duration of acquisition Press the START STOP key to start the acquisition The red indicator goes on to show that the MTS T BERD 8000 is in process of acquisition and the screen displays the trace in process of acquisition The quality of the connection i
288. ted Code View Codes Fig 122 Color code definition Use the arrow gt to enter the name of the operator carrying out the measurement In contrast to the other data in this menu the comment is specific to a fiber and not to the whole cable This line is thus used to enter a new comment and not to display it The comment appears at the top of the screen with the other parameters of the fiber see figure Example of signature of an OTDR file in the File Menu on page 247 This comment will remain available for the next acquisition unless it is deleted It is also saved when a trace is saved with a comment User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 15 File management File configuration menu File export This sub menu appears when the option lt mail gt has been configured with one media for example Ethernet in the system setup menu see the base manual of the Base Unit reference 8000M02 for example To send a mail you must have filled the 2 following fields Mail to Use the arrow key gt to enter in the edition window and enter the name of the recipient Subject Using the same key enter the subject of the mail or a comment if necessary Buttons on the Saving traces right of the screen Fig 123 Save These buttons are used to save one or more traces Store Trace allows to save the current trace opened Store all Traces allows to store all the traces displayed in overlay OTDR and OSA only in one sing
289. ted to the end of the fiber at the point where the optical receiver would be connected 206 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 12 OFI Module LTS function Attenuation For measurement of the attenuation of power in a complete link or in measurements elements such as sections of fiber connections or optical components a optical link loss light source and a power meter are required This attenuation is usually deduced from the measurement of optical power at two points Laser light source of the Base Unit Power meter of the Base Unit Reference Link under test fiber Attenuation AaB P1 dBm P2 dBm To perform accurate measurements the following conditions are vital Use one of the light sources of the LTS or a light source which is stable both in time and as a function of temperature Make sure that all connections and fibers and the receiving cell are perfectly clean Use a reference link between the laser source and the test subject If several measurements are to be made under identical light injec tion conditions this reference fiber must not be disconnected during the period while measurements are taking place Insertion loss method 1 The power meter is first connected to the laser source via the refer ence fiber P1 is measured Then the fiber to be tested is inserted between the reference fiber and the power meter P2 is measured The difference between P2 and P1 gives the attenuation of the
290. test 79 Fibers standards 15 File configuration 246 expedition 255 naming 247 G Ghosts 55 Index of refraction specifications 284 L Launch cable 53 Lower amp upper thresholds OFI 210 Macro adding interaction 274 calling 272 Default 275 File 273 overwrite 275 Playback 276 recording 272 renaming 274 Standard 272 Mail file expedition 255 OFI FOX function 223 Markers OTDR 70 addition 71 delete 72 hints 72 representation 71 Measurement attenuation specif 284 distance specif 284 principle 1 318 reflectance specif 284 reflectometry specif 284 Memory see File Modules BBS specif 300 CD specif 294 297 fibers 298 MTAU specif 300 OTDR range 289 PMD specif 293 WDM specif 292 MTAU auto mode 232 configuration 231 manual mode 231 sequence test configuration 233 perform 234 O OFI Attenuator ext powermeter 209 FOX 214 configuration 214 distant module 222 measurement acquisition 220 results display 222 send message 223 taking ref loss 217 taking ref ORL 219 Zero adjustment ORL 220 LTS attenuation measurement 14 207 Configuration 208 Connection 208 insertion loss measurement 14 207 power measurement 13 206 source configuration 210 Manual ORL 224 Measurement acquisition 225 reference 225 results 225 Power meter measurements 214 ref measurement 213 zero setting 213 Source User Manual 780000102 16 Index connection 208
291. the process by pressing the button START STOP on the master Base Unit It is also possible to request from the slave Base Unit that the measure ment is stopped by pressing the button START STOP The master unit receives the request via a message on the screen lt Remote asks for stop do you agree gt If Yes the measurement is stopped if No the measure ment resumes User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 6 Bi directional OTDR Trace display functions Trace display functions Selection Local Remote Bi Directional a ro la r P w LE E s Fig 39 Butterfly representation of the bi directional measurement By selecting the Curves with the Process Curves Summary key the unit displays the traces and results like in classical OTDR mode adding bi directional measurement results In the Curve page the multi choice key allows to visualize successively the local trace the remote trace or both superposed mee NOTE The remote trace is reversed in order to superpose both traces in a butterfly fashion see Butterfly representation of the bi directional measurement page 97 1 In our example St Etienne corresponds to the extremity connected to the local unit Lyon corresponds to the extremity connected to the remote unit User Manual 780000102 16 97 Chapter 6 Bi directional OTDR Trace display functions me NOTE You may only use this key to change page when the m
292. threshold defined in the SETUP menu are displayed NOTE Before starting an automatic measurement make sure that the func tion Lock Evts accessible by pressing Advanced is not activated the icon Ea must not be present in the left hand corner under the trace By means of this method of detection you can quickly locate all the faults in the fiber under test If an automatic measurement does not detect all the events additional manual measurements can be carried out To delete all the markers press the Advanced key then select Del Res When there have not been any measurements to carry out an automatic measurement press Advanced then select the function Auto Mes The following procedure is recommended 1 Fully automatic measurement the instrument locates the events and proceeds to the measurements 2 Addition of markers see Addition of markers on page 71 in the cases of splices showing low attenuation and of close events The MTS T BERD 8000 then automatically measures the slope before and after the markers selected and measures the attenuation of the splice User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements Addition of markers 3 Addition of manual measurements if necessary in the case of very close events The MTS T BERD 8000 performs the measurements requested by the user To start an automatic measurement while a measurement is already in progress 1 Press the Advanced key 2 Selec
293. tical analyzer displays a spectrum representing all the channels The measurement results are shown in the form of a complete spectrum analysis and a table of the parameters relating to each carrier The optical spectrum analyzer performs automatic detection and measurements on each channel The number of channels and the composite power are shown and for each channel the wavelength the interval between channels the power level the signal to noise ratio The total power of the system can also be given To qualify the amplifier gain tilt and slope can be calculated In principle amplification should be flat right across the WDM spectrum In order to ensure the best BER ratio it is sometimes necessary to be able to test DFB lasers widely used in DWDM technology DFB measurements are the following SMSR Side mode Suppression Ratio the amplitude difference between the main spectral component and the largest side mode Mode Offset Wavalength separation expressed in nm between the main spectral component and the SMSR mode Peak Amplitude The power level of the main spectral component of the DFB laser Bandwidth Displayed bandwidth of the main spectral component of the DFB laser User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 1 Principles of measurement PMD principle Peak of the main spectral component A Bandwidth Side Mode Supression Ratio gt f f oN M wth ba ge a
294. ting optical element can be quantified It is defined as the ratio of the power reflected by the element over the incident power These reflections are due to variations in refractive index all along the optical link in certain telecommunications applications If they are not controlled they may degrade the performance of the system by perturbing the operation of the emitting laser especially DFB lasers or may generate interference noise in the receiver by multiple reflections The reflectometer is particularly well suited to the measurement of discrete reflectances on an optical fiber link To calculate the coefficient of reflection it is necessary to measure the total amplitude of the Fresnel reflection generated and then to apply a conversion formula to obtain the reflectance value This formula takes into account the total amplitude of the reflection measured by the reflectometer the pulse width used to measure the amplitude of the reflection in nanoseconds the backscatter coefficient of the fiber used User Manual 780000102 16 3 Chapter 1 Principles of measurement Principle of bi directional measurement typical values of the backscatter coefficient for a pulse of 1 ns and for a single mode fiber 79 dB to 1310 nm 81 dB to 1550 nm and 1625 nm for a multi mode fiber 70 dB to 850 nm 75 dB to 1300 nm NOTE To measure the widest range of reflection coefficient it is necessary to insert a variabl
295. tion No Not available I OSNR sensitivity Not available Low Fast Resolution Full Measurements settings Type WDM I OSNR Channel detection permanent Signal threshold Auto Min channel spacing Std 50GHz OSNR OSNR method left amp right Auto S lt gt N distance Auto Not available Noise acq BW std 0 100nm Splitter compensation No Tilt amp Slope Gain No 106 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 7 Optical Spectrum Measurement WDM OSA test configuration Results screen settings Grid default last value used Alarms No Wavelength range Auto Table notes No Unit nm Configuration of the file set up see Chapter 15 Filenaming Cable_id Fiber_Num Test_Poin Direc tion Auto Store Yes Nb Fiber Increment Yes 2 or define your own configuration The parameter to be modified must be selected by means of the direction keys A The possible options then appear on the screen make your choiceising the direction keys and p gt The various parameters proposed are defined below Serep Single Jovereging acquisition No Resoktien ra E vou ore For Channel detection Signal threshold Min Channel Spacing osn Splitter Compensation ThA Stope Gain lest I a fate Grid Manual IOSH Aarm Nowe Wavetength tanger Auto a Notes labie No Una nm Cosa Fig 42 Configuration for optical spectrum measurements User
296. tional measurement also called OEO measurement Origin End Origin This measurement requires that two 8000 Base Units are connected at each extremity of the fiber under test Every Base Unit must be equipped with the software option called OEO OTDR and with both optical talkset and OTDR plug in It is strongly recommended that the same type of OTDR is used A N same reference at each extremity of the fiber The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows Definition of terms used on page 88 Description of the measurement on page 88 Configuration of bi directional measurement on page 90 Performing a bi directional measurement on page 92 Trace display functions on page 97 OEO Result table on page 99 Automatic measurement and Addition of markers in OEO page on page 100 File management on page 100 Test of a cable on page 101 Troubleshooting on page 102 User Manual 780000102 16 87 Chapter 6 Bi directional OTDR Definition of terms used Definition of terms used Master Slave unit The master unit is the Base Unit that initiates the measurement at one extremity of the fiber The slave unit is the Base Unit connected on the other extremity of the fiber and connected to the master unit via the data connection Local remote unit These terms are used in the Process Display page see Process page display with t
297. to chooses the best formula depending on the acquisition band Amplified Link No refer to Performing a CD measurement through amplifiers on page 198 Normalized to km Yes 190 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 11 CD measurements using phase shift method Configuring the CD test Show Measured points No Show Fit Formula No Saving parameters see Chapter 15 File management Auto Store Yes Increment Fiber Number Yes To define your own configuration choose the parameter to be modified using the direction keys then choose the option for this parameter with the keys 4 and p gt Fig 75 Configuration of CD test with ODM Module The configuration parameters of the CD test are described below mee NOTE The key Copy Setup for all is displayed when the CD function is selected on the ODM module as well as one or several other func tions of this module II allows to apply the CD configuration to the other selected function s of the ODM module Acquisition Last Reference BBS Type BBS Serial Number parameters These parameters provide the relevant information related to the Broad band source BBS referencing These parameters cannot be modified as they are automatically gener ated after a reference measurement see Performing a Reference measurement on page 194 User Manual 780000102 16 191 Chapter 11 CD measurements using phase shift method Configuring the CD test Measurements
298. ton gives the information relating to the measurement in progress results previously saved and the commands available for measurement and saving The power measured by the power meter is displayed in large charac ters in the units selected in the SETUP menu together with the mode of transmission of the signal measured continuous CW or modulated to a frequency of 270Hz 330Hz 1KHz or 2KHz User Manual 780000102 16 211 Chapter 12 OFI Module LTS function Table of results Commands of the 212 power meter parameters the wavelength of the signal measured the reference level expressed in dB the level of Attenuation Compensation For one and the same fiber the power meter displays a table of 9 results corresponding to the different possible wavelengths The table shows the power measured in dBm the relative power in dB and the reference level in dBm if units dB together with the mode A measurement result is displayed in the table when the Keep Result softkey is pressed The Clear Table softkey orders deletion of all the results displayed in the table If the Alarm function has been activated any result that exceeds the selected thresholds appears in red in the table Otherwise results are shown in the table in green When the instrument is switched off results present in the table are saved 3 5dBm 1 6 25 50 60 1569nm dBm Results o of the power meter Fig 89 Result
299. ule ay a TN Fig 134 Exposing the printer out of the module To expose the printer out of the module 1 Unscrew the locking screws on each side of the module 2 Pullon these screws to lift the printer up until you reach the maximum exposed position and hear the click of the lever mee NOTE You may use the printer in the same manner whether it is fully inte grated in its module or exposed as shown in the figure 280 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 17 Printer Loading a new paper roll Releasing the To release the printer hold the module while you push on the lever printer back into the module It is important to hold the module while you push on the lever If you A N don t you may stuck your finger and or damage the internal printer Loading a new paper roll In order to load a new paper roll proceed as follows 1 Expose the printer outside of its module see Exposing the printer page 280 2 Setthe lever to position A Insert the paper roll as shown on figure Loading paper in the printer page 281 4 Fold the paper to ease loading Ensure paper is enrolled as shown on figure Loading paper in the printer page 281 Pull paper through opening in panel 7 Reset the lever to position C 5 Ensure paper is unrolled as shown 4 Fold the paper to ease loading 2 Lever in position A 3 Push in opposite direction Spare paper roll may to insert the paper roll be inserted here
300. ults Table display of the table alone Mini trace display Distance S to N File name Alarm result 3 Number of acquisitions Fiber Number A Ia Goinm PIE MIIS R Wavelength and power M an difference between a a sors A and B 118 As Azn Wd z5 Esmoma PEJoEoomwa Gosa Fig 43 Example of OSA test result with grid Channel detection threshold On the trace some peaks corresponding to noise could be mistaken for channels It is therefore necessary to fix a power threshold level only peaks that exceed this threshold will be considered as channels and included in the table of results To display or modify this threshold press the SETUP key then select Signal threshold Modify the value to position it on Auto or fix a threshold value Display of a grid The display window of the trace can include a grid to facilitate verification of the position of the channels Several grids are possible see the chapter Parameters of display and analysis of the results p 113 1 The Auto value is obtained by continuing to reduce the value of the threshold below the minimum value of 79 9 dBm User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 7 Optical Spectrum Measurement Trace display functions Display of total power between cursors To display on the trace the total power between the two cursors A and B Place the cursors at the desired positions Press the Advanced key then Total Power A lt gt B The space b
301. um Measurement WDM OSA test configuration I OSNR sensitivity only valid for OSA 320 This parameter defines the resolution of the polarization nulling routine for true in band OSNR measurement Low fast low sensitivity mode for fast measurements recommended for ROADM system testing at data rates up to 12 5Gbps and OSNR values lt 25dB Medium recommended for data rates of 2 40Gbps and OSNR 2 22 dB or for data rates up to 12 5Gbps and OSNR 2 25dB High recommended for data rates of 2 40Gbps and OSNR 2 22 dB Averaging No Low Medium High This function can reduce the noise level of a value up to 5 dB When the acquisition is averaged a bar graph showing the state of advancement of the averaging is displayed at the bottom right of the screen Resolution Full maximum resolution of the filter value depends on specifica tion of OSA XXX module 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 or 0 5 nm for 507XXX series and 81XXX series plug ins 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 1 2 or 5 nm for modules OSA XXX Number of sweeps In Statistics mode this must be selected between 2 and 1000 Long Term NOTE A long term measurement can be done only if the Sweep parameter is on Statistic mode No Manual the measurement is done manually once the key Stop Wait is pressed Period the measurement is automatically done after the wait period selected see hereunder User Manual 780000102 16 109 Chapter 7 Opti
302. um amplitude of the modulation The instrument should have a higher dynamic range than the link itself A 35 dB dynamic range is usually enough for most of the applications and 45 dB should be used for very long distance networks The measurement range of the PMD should be linked with the transmis sion rate For WDM applications it should be between 0 1 ps to 60 ps so that measurement can be carried out for bit rates between 2 5 and 40 Gbit s The table below indicates the maximum permitted PMD values for various bit rates saeco Maxime PD PD a 2 5 40 lt 2 10 10 lt 0 5 40 2 5 lt 0 125 Tables at the end of chapitre gives amore complete list of the maximum PMD values for different bit rates information about the appropriate standards and limits for PMD Principle of measurement of Chromatic Dispersion CD OTDR using pulse delay method Since more and more links including those already installed are being used to transmit WDM Wavelength Division Multiplex signals or signals at 10 Gbit s it becomes very important to determine the chromatic dispersion CD Chromatic dispersion CD is due to a variation with wavelength of the refractive index of the fiber This results in delays in propagation for some wavelengths which broadens the pulse transmitted along the fiber causing consequent distortions and increasing the Bit Error Rate BER of the optical system User Manual 7800001
303. up on both units becomes In progress NOTE A warning may occur if the configurations of the two units are different see Warning errors resulting from checking common configurations page 103 The begin launch cable is transferred to the end launch cable and the end launch cable is transferred to the begin launch cable The master Base Unit must indeed know both extremities of the fiber and will send the information to the slave Base Unit The direction of the link is defined by the master Base Unit which transmits the opposite direction to the slave Base Unit In the File configuration each Base Unit points to its own directory Only the master Base Unit may save a measurement lt Auto storage gt and lt File type gt parameters only concern the master unit and are not com pared or transferred to the slave Base Unit The list of lasers for which a measurement will be performed is set by the master Base Unit If these lasters are not all available on the slave Base Unit the list shall be restricted to the ones that are available When both menus SETUP and FILE are identical the validation symbol a is displayed and the process goes to Step 2 User Manual 780000102 16 95 Chapter 6 Bi directional OTDR Performing a bi directional measurement 96 Step 2 The line lt Check if same fiber for both units gt becomes lt In progress gt If the master Base Unit successfully detects the other Base Unit at the extremity of t
304. w reference If the reference measurements are too weak a warning is displayed Clean all connections to improve the reference measurements the Base Unit The reference is only valid if the jumpers are not disconnected from Taking the reference in a loop back mode mE NOTE This reference can be made wether the Base Units are on the same site or not 1 Connect the optical output of the source FOX port to the optical input of the power meter by means of a jumper 2 Push the References key Push the Loss Loopback key 4 Push the Go key a l Fig 92 Taking a reference in a loop back mode Once the reference is taken the reference table is updated for the wavelengths available on the local instrument It indicates the type of reference used 218 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 12 OFI Module FOX Function The date of the reference as well as the type and serial number of the local instrument are indicated on the first line of the table If the reference is correct disconnect the jumper in order to connect the fiber to be tested If the reference is not correct take a new reference Establishing a Two steps must be carried out to take a reference for a ORL measure reference for an Ment ORL measure 1 Power emitted reference ment 2 Zero ORL adjustment Follow the order given above to take the reference They are not two A N different processes but two steps necessary to establish a reference
305. wering No cancels all the sequence but keeps the configuration in memory Answering Yes starts the first measurement 4 After each measurement is done a new message follows if another measurement is configured in the sequence such as in step 3 5 The sequence is terminated when no more message is displayed and the led from the MTAU tab changes from g to Go back to step 1 with a new fiber The order of the sequence will take in consideration the order in which the sequence is displayed on screen starting with the ports order then with the functions order In our example the sequence will measure successively OTDR OSA then PMD Some messages may appear during the sequence to request specific actions necessary for the measurement just like check source appears before a PMD measurement The focus is on the active function and the link becomes green Even though this is not necessary it is possible to go to the measurement corresponding tab when a function is being used and see the results of the acquisition launched the sequence is automatically updated and continues if the function was not currently used or is immediately stopped otherwise In this last case an error message is displayed indicating that the function has been deselected If a function is deselected in the SETUP page while the sequence is If you wish to stop a measurement but not the sequence go to the corre sponding measurement tab and click
306. wo T BERD 8000 page 94 Each unit is considered Local on its own screen Gees NOTE These terms are to be distinguished from the measurement direction and extremities of the fiber see Fiber Description page 249 Description of the measurement me NOTE The measurement principle and methods used are described in Prin ciple of bi directional measurement page 4 Thanks to the software option OEO OTDR bi directional measurement can be fully automatic A minimum of two fibers is required Two Base Units equiped with the talkset option and an OTDR plug in are linked at every extremity of the fiber to test at the same time A data connection is established between the two talkset ports of the units via another fiber in order to exchange orders configurations and measurement results me NOTE For automatic bidirectional OTDR testing two units having the talset option and the E80 bidirectional option are rquired 88 User Manual 780000102 16 A A Summary of the automatic operation procedure Chapter 6 Bi directional OTDR Description of the measurement Example with 8000 series Fully automatic bi directional acquisitions can not be performed with out a data connection see Data transfer in the user manual of the Base Unit reference 8000M02 for example Please check that the OTDR function has been selected see Selecting the function page 46 For best measurements and in order to qualif
307. xtension on a MTS 5000 plug in Installing a A plug in may be inserted into either of the two slots provided for the plug in ina Purpose receptacle and When a slot is vacant it is closed by means of a cover plate fitted with removing it two captive screws like those on the plug ins Captive screws securing the plug in Fig 11 Rear view of the Base Unit example 18 User Manual 780000102 16 Chapter 2 Getting started Universal connectors and adapters Removing a plug in froma receptacle The Base Unit must be switched off and if it has a mains power sup A N ply the adapter cable must be unplugged 1 Completely unscrew up to the stop the two captive screws securing the plug in 2 Carefully slide the plug in out of its slot Inserting a plug in into receptacle The Base Unit must be switched off and if it has a mains power sup A N ply the adapter cable must be unplugged 1 Slide the plug in into its slot 2 When itis fully home press against the screen printed surface of the plug in while tightening the the securing screws The screen printed surface of the plug in must be flush with that of the recep tacle 3 Make sure that the two large captive screws of the plug in are screwed fully home mee NOTE UHD plug ins use very powerful lasers they must be connected exclusively to optical connectors equiped with zirconium ferules Using connectors equiped with metallic ferrules could damage the plug in co
308. y 162 results table 165 Bi directionnal OTDR principle of measurement 4 Backscatter coefficient 4 Battery on microprocessor board 21 BBS activation 242 function 242 remote interlock connector 244 Bend 52 User Manual 780000102 16 C CD acquisition parameters 169 191 analysis parameters 170 auto acquisition 174 Configuration 168 190 detection end of fiber 177 end of acquisition 175 manual acquisition 174 measurement conditions 173 measurement on section 183 measurement process 173 placing markers 178 results sreen parameters 171 193 source function 186 standards and limits 185 203 CD ODM Acquisition 197 Configuration 190 File Management 202 Reference Measurement 194 Results 199 CD ROM burning 260 Channel filtering OSA 124 Coefficient of dispersion 10 11 12 317 Coefficient of reflection 3 4 Commands external keyboard 35 CompactFlash 27 Connection quality 57 Connectors references 309 Cursor 2 cursors method 74 5 cursors method 75 movement 38 resolution 284 selection 38 D Data transfer 260 DFB analysis 6 configuration 129 measurements 130 results 130 Distance specif OTDR measurement 284 E EDFA configuration 127 measurement 127 results 128 Event macro 273 276 Event CD 173 175 179 Event OTDR 63 icons 66 External Keyboard 35 F Fault Locator Bend 79 80 configuration 78 function 77 User Manual 780000102 16 Index
309. y effective means of increasing the transmission of fibers as it demands neither the installation of new links nor any increase in transmission speed The data are transmitted along the fiber at different wavelengths each wave length or channel transmitting a signal The channels are defined according to the the G 692 recommendations of the ITU T This technology demands new measurements since it is important during the installation and maintenance of WDM systems to check the following parameters 1 Presence of the channels at the corresponding wavelengths with no drift Correct channel power levels without power variation 3 Satisfactory signal to noise ratio SNR its value is obtained by measuring the ratio of channel peak power to the noise power level of the ASE signal to the right and or left of the carrier As a general 1 Amplified Spontaneous Emission User Manual 780000102 16 5 Chapter 1 Principles of measurement Principle of WDM OSA analysis Measurement results DFB analysis rule the noise measurement point chosen is the calculated mid point between two adjacent channels The noise power level measured is converted to a standard bandwidth of 0 1 nm The most important item of equipment for carrying out these tests on WDM systems is the optical spectrum analyzer OSA It can be connected at critical measurement points in the WDM system to the ends of the links or to the amplifier locations The op
310. y the fiber link and con nectors launch cables shall be inserted between the OTDR modules and the link Test if both units are linked to the same fiber Consistency verification of the OTDR plug in between the two units Consistency verification of acquisition configuration measurement and files fiber and link definition Then transfer of the master unit configuration to the slave unit if necessary Acquisition start on the master unit Trace transfer to the slave unit Acquisition start on the slave unit Trace transfer to the master unit Bi directional measurement on both units Results storage in a single OEO file or in two SOR files All this test procedure is fully automatic and all results are immediately accessible on both units User Manual 780000102 16 89 Chapter 6 Bi directional OTDR Configuration of bi directional measurement Configuration of bi directional measurement To access the OEO configuration menu press the button SETUP from the Base Unit OEO parameters are now displayed Please check that the OEO OTDR tab has been selected Acquisition parameters are the same as for OTDR measurements see Configuring the reflectometry test page 46 for their description Only different or extra parameters are presented in this chapter a amp Ss Laser Putse Hons Pom Range 10h Nerobtion 7 Delete traces om Start Detection Index Of Hetraction S
311. ypical from 14 to 50 dB with APC connector Standalone power meter Standalone powermeter functions 81xx OFI Module Wavelength range adjust able per 1 nm 800 to1650 nm Selectable wavelength 850 980 1300 1310 1420 1450 1480 1490 1510 1550 1625 nm and one user defined Auto A detection if signals are emitted by a JDSU source 850 1310 1490 1550 1625 nm Detected modulation 270 Hz 330 Hz 1 kHz 2 kHz Power Level Standard High Power Display range 10 to 60 dBm 26 to 55 dBm Accuracy 0 2 dB 5 dBmto 0 25 dB 23 dBm 50 dBm to 50 dBm Detector type Ge Filtered InGaAs 2 mm Display resolution 0 01 dB Type of fiber 9 um to 50 um Warning 302 Warning for 82PRINTER module 81WDM 81PMD 81WDMPMD and UHD and VLR plug ins These are class A products In a domestic environment theses products may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures User Manual 780000102 16 Options and accessories This chapter describes all the accessories and options available with the MTS T BERD series The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows References of measurement plug ins on page 304 User manual references on page 309 References of optical connectors and adapters on page 309 User Manual 780000102 16 303

Downloading - AD INSTRUMENTS

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents